MELSEC-A-QnA (Large), AnS-QnAS (Small) Transition Examples - L08121ed

Download as pdf or txt
Download as pdf or txt
You are on page 1of 176

Programmable Controllers

MELSEC-A/QnA (Large), AnS/QnAS (Small)


Transition Examples

Sep. 2013 Edition


SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
(Read these precautions before using this product.)

Before using products introduced in this publication, please read this Transition
Examples and relevant manuals carefully and pay full attention to safety to handle
the product correctly.
In this publication, the safety precautions are classified into two levels:
" WARNING" and " CAUTION".

Indicates that incorrect handling may cause hazardous conditions,


WARNING resulting in death or severe injury.

Indicates that incorrect handling may cause hazardous conditions,


CAUTION resulting in minor or moderate injury or property damage.

Under some circumstances, failure to observe the precautions given under " CAUTION" may lead
to serious consequences.
Observe the precautions of both levels because they are important for personal and system safety.

Make sure that the end users read this publication and keep it in a safe place for future reference.

1
[Design Precautions]

WARNING
● Configure safety circuits external to the programmable controller to ensure that the entire system operates
safely even when a fault occurs in the external power supply or the programmable controller. Failure to do
so may result in an accident due to an incorrect output or malfunction.

(1) Configure external safety circuits, such as an emergency stop circuit, protection circuit, and protective
interlock circuit for forward/reverse operation or upper/lower limit positioning.

(2) The programmable controller stops its operation upon detection of the following status, and the output
status of the system will be as shown below.

Status Q Series module A/AnS Series module

Overcurrent or overvoltage protection


All outputs are turned off. All outputs are turned off.
of the power supply module is activated.

The CPU module detects an error such as All outputs are held or turned
a watchdog timer error by the self-diagnostic off according to the parameter All outputs are turned off.
function. setting.

All outputs may turn on when an error occurs in the part, such as I/O control part, where the CPU module
cannot detect any error. To ensure safety operation in such a case, provide a safety mechanism or a
fail-safe circuit external to the programmable controller. For a fail-safe circuit example, refer to Chapter 10
LOADING AND INSTALLATION in the QCPU User's Manual (Hardware Design, Maintenance and
Inspection).

(3) Outputs may remain on or off due to a failure of an output module relay or transistor. Configure an
external circuit for monitoring output signals that could cause a serious accident.

● In an output module, when a load current exceeding the rated current or an overcurrent caused by a load
short-circuit flows for a long time, it may cause smoke and fire. To prevent this, configure an external safety
circuit, such as a fuse.

● Configure a circuit so that the programmable controller is turned on first and then the external power supply.
If the external power supply is turned on first, an accident may occur due to an incorrect output or
malfunction.

● For the operating status of each station after a communication failure, refer to relevant manuals for the
network.
Incorrect output or malfunction due to a communication failure may result in an accident.

2
[Design Precautions]

WARNING
● When changing data of the running programmable controller from a peripheral connected to the CPU
module or from a personal computer connected to an intelligent function module/special function module,
configure an interlock circuit in the sequence program to ensure that the entire system will always operate
safely.
For program modification and operating status change, read relevant manuals carefully and ensure the
safety before operation.
Especially, in the case of a control from an external device to a remote programmable controller, immediate
action cannot be taken for a problem on the programmable controller due to a communication failure.
Configure an interlock circuit in the sequence program, and determine corrective actions to be taken
between the external device and CPU module in case of a communication failure.

CAUTION
● Do not install the control lines or communication cables together with the main circuit lines or power cables.
Keep a distance of 100mm (3.94 inches) or more between them.
Failure to do so may result in malfunction due to noise.

● When a device such as a lamp, heater, or solenoid valve is controlled through an output module, a large
current (approximately ten times greater than normal) may flow when the output is turned from off to on.
Take measures such as replacing the module with one having a sufficient current rating.

● The time for the CPU module to enter the RUN status after the CPU module is powered off and on or reset
will vary depending on the system configuration, parameter settings, and/or program size, etc.
Design the program so that the entire system will operate safely even if the time to reach the RUN status
varies.

3
[Installation Precautions]

CAUTION
● Use the programmable controller in an environment that meets the general specifications in the QCPU
User's Manual (Hardware Design, Maintenance and Inspection).
Failure to do so may result in electric shock, fire, malfunction, or damage to or deterioration of the product.

● To mount the module, while pressing the module mounting lever located in the lower part of the module, fully
insert the module fixing projection(s) into the hole(s) in the base unit and press the module until it snaps into
place.
Incorrect mounting may cause malfunction, failure or drop of the module.
When using the programmable controller in an environment of frequent vibrations, fix the module with a
screw.
Tighten the screw within the specified torque range.
Undertightening can cause drop of the screw, short circuit or malfunction.
Overtightening can damage the screw and/or module, resulting in drop, short circuit, or malfunction.

● When using an extension cable, connect it to the extension cable connector of the base unit securely.
Check the connection for looseness.
Poor contact may cause incorrect input or output.

● When using a memory card, fully insert it into the memory card slot.
Check that it is inserted completely.
Poor contact may cause malfunction.

● Shut off the external power supply for the system in all phases before mounting or removing the module.
Failure to do so may result in damage to the product.
A module can be replaced online (while power is on) on any MELSECNET/H remote I/O station or in the
system where a CPU module supporting the online module change function is used.
Note that there are restrictions on the modules that can be replaced online, and each module has its
predetermined replacement procedure.
For details, refer to the relevant sections in the QCPU User's Manual (Hardware Design, Maintenance and
Inspection) and in the manual for the corresponding module.

● Do not directly touch any conductive part of the module.


Doing so can cause malfunction or failure of the module.

4
[Wiring Precautions]

WARNING
● Shut off the external power supply for the system in all phases before mounting or wiring the module.
Failure to do so may result in electric shock or damage to the product.

● After mounting or wiring, attach the included terminal cover onto the module before turning the power on or
starting operation.
Failure to do so may result in electric shock.

CAUTION
● Ground the FG and LG terminals to the protective ground conductor dedicated to the programmable
controller.
Failure to do so may result in electric shock or malfunction.

● Use applicable solderless terminals and tighten them within the specified torque range.
If any spade solderless terminal is used, it may be disconnected when the terminal screw comes loose,
resulting in failure.

● Check the rated voltage and terminal layout before wiring to the module, and connect the cables correctly.
Connecting a power supply with a different voltage rating or incorrect wiring may cause a fire or failure.

● Connectors for external connection must be crimped or pressed with the tool specified by the manufacturer,
or must be correctly soldered.
Incomplete connections could result in short circuit, fire, or malfunction.

● Do not bundle the control cable or communication cable with the main circuit or power wire, or lay them
adjacently.
Separate these by 100 mm or more.
Failure to observe this could lead to malfunctioning caused by noise.

● Tightening the terminal screws within the specified torque range.


 Under tightening the terminal screws can cause short circuit, a fire or malfunction.
 Overtightening can damage the screw and/or module, resulting in drop, short circuit, or malfunction.

● Prevent foreign matter such as dust or wire chips from entering the module.
Such foreign matter can cause a fire, failure, or malfunction.

5
[Wiring Precautions]

CAUTION
● A protective film is attached to the top of the module to prevent foreign matter, such as wire chips, from
entering the module during wiring.
Do not remove the film during wiring.
Remove it for heat dissipation before system operation.

● Mitsubishi programmable controllers must be installed in control panels.


Connect the main power supply to the power supply module in the control panel through a relay terminal
block.
Wiring and replacement of a power supply module must be performed by maintenance personnel who is
familiar with protection against electric shock. (For wiring methods, refer to the QCPU User's Manual
(Hardware Design, Maintenance and Inspection)).

[Startup and Maintenance Precautions]

WARNING
● Do not touch any terminal while power is on.
Doing so will cause electric shock.

● Correctly connect the battery connector.


Do not charge, disassemble, heat, short-circuit, solder, or throw the battery into the fire.
Doing so will cause the battery to produce heat, explode, or ignite, resulting in injury and fire.

● Shut off the external power supply for the system in all phases before cleaning the module or retightening
the terminal screws or module fixing screws.
Failure to do so may result in electric shock.
Undertightening the terminal screws can cause short circuit or malfunction.
Overtightening can damage the screw and/or module, resulting in drop, short circuit, or malfunction.

6
[Startup and Maintenance Precautions]

CAUTION
● Before performing online operations (especially, program modification, forced output, and operation status
change) for the running CPU module from the peripheral connected, read relevant manuals carefully and
ensure the safety.
Improper operation may damage machines or cause accidents.

● Do not disassemble or modify the modules.


Doing so may cause failure, malfunction, injury, or a fire.

● Use any radio communication device such as a cellular phone or PHS (Personal Handy-phone System)
more than 25cm (9.85 inches) away in all directions from the programmable controller.
Failure to do so may cause malfunction.

● Shut off the external power supply for the system in all phases before mounting or removing the module.
Failure to do so may cause the module to fail or malfunction.
A module can be replaced online (while power is on) on any MELSECNET/H remote I/O station or in the
system where a CPU module supporting the online module change function is used.
Note that there are restrictions on the modules that can be replaced online, and each module has its
predetermined replacement procedure.
For details, refer to the relevant sections in the QCPU User's Manual (Hardware Design, Maintenance and
Inspection) and in the manual for the corresponding module.

● After the first use of the product, do not mount/remove the module to/from the base unit, and the terminal
block to/from the module more than 50 times (IEC 61131-2 compliant) respectively.
Exceeding the limit of 50 times may cause malfunction.

● Do not drop or apply shock to the battery to be installed in the module.


Doing so may damage the battery, causing the battery fluid to leak inside the battery.
If the battery is dropped or any shock is applied to it, dispose of it without using.

● Before handling the module, touch a grounded metal object to discharge the static electricity from the human
body.
Failure to do so may cause the module to fail or malfunction.

7
[Disposal Precautions]

CAUTION
● When disposing of this product, treat it as industrial waste.
When disposing of batteries, separate them from other wastes according to the local regulations.
(For details of the battery directive in EU member states, refer to the QCPU User's Manual
(Hardware Design, Maintenance and Inspection).)

[Transportation Precautions]

CAUTION
● When transporting lithium batteries, follow the transportation regulations.
(For details of the regulated models, refer to the QCPU User's Manual (Hardware Design, Maintenance and
Inspection).)

8
CONDITIONS OF USE FOR THE PRODUCT
(1) Mitsubishi programmable controller ("the PRODUCT") shall be used in conditions;
i) Where any problem, fault or failure occurring in the PRODUCT, if any, shall not lead to any major or serious
accident; and
ii) Where the backup and fail-safe function are systematically or automatically provided outside of the
PRODUCT for the case of any problem, fault or failure occurring in the PRODUCT.

(2) The PRODUCT has been designed and manufactured for the purpose of being used in general industries.
MITSUBISHI SHALL HAVE NO RESPONSIBILITY OR LIABILITY (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO ANY
AND ALL RESPONSIBILITY OR LIABILITY BASED ON CONTRACT, WARRANTY, TORT, PRODUCT
LIABILITY) FOR ANY INJURY OR DEATH TO PERSONS OR LOSS OR DAMAGE TO PROPERTY CAUSED
BY the PRODUCT THAT ARE OPERATED OR USED IN APPLICATION NOT INTENDED OR EXCLUDED BY
INSTRUCTIONS, PRECAUTIONS, OR WARNING CONTAINED IN MITSUBISHI'S USER, INSTRUCTION
AND/OR SAFETY MANUALS, TECHNICAL BULLETINS AND GUIDELINES FOR the PRODUCT.
("Prohibited Application")
Prohibited Applications include, but not limited to, the use of the PRODUCT in;
• Nuclear Power Plants and any other power plants operated by Power companies, and/or any other cases in
which the public could be affected if any problem or fault occurs in the PRODUCT.
• Railway companies or Public service purposes, and/or any other cases in which establishment of a special
quality assurance system is required by the Purchaser or End User.
• Aircraft or Aerospace, Medical applications, Train equipment, transport equipment such as Elevator and
Escalator, Incineration and Fuel devices, Vehicles, Manned transportation, Equipment for Recreation and
Amusement, and Safety devices, handling of Nuclear or Hazardous Materials or Chemicals, Mining and
Drilling, and/or other applications where there is a significant risk of injury to the public or property.

Notwithstanding the above, restrictions Mitsubishi may in its sole discretion, authorize use of the PRODUCT in
one or more of the Prohibited Applications, provided that the usage of the PRODUCT is limited only for the
specific applications agreed to by Mitsubishi and provided further that no special quality assurance or fail-safe,
redundant or other safety features which exceed the general specifications of the PRODUCTs are required. For
details, please contact the Mitsubishi representative in your region.

9
Revisions
Print Date Publication Number* Revision
Jul., 2008 L(NA)08121E-A First edition
Jan., 2011 L(NA)08121E-B Addition
CONDITIONS OF USE FOR THE PRODUCT, Replacement options
and module selection guide, Chapter 4, Section 7.3, Section 8.2,
Chapter 11, Chapter 12, Chapter 14, Chapter 15, Chapter 17,
Appendix 1, Appendix 2
Partial correction
Safety Precautions, Chapters were reorganized and contents were
revised(whole)
Sep., 2012 L(NA)08121E-C Addition
Section 1.2, Section 2.4, Section 4.3, Section 4.4, Chapter 5 (5),
Section 6.3
Change
Chapter 1 → Section 1.1, Chapter 4 (Title changed),
Chapter 6 (Title changed), Section 6.3 → Section 6.4

Partial correction
Safety Precautions, Introduction, Replacement options and module
selection guide
Chapter 3, Section 5.1, Section 5.2, Section 6.1, Section 10.1,
Chapter 14, Appendix 2.2, Appendix 2.6

Sep., 2013 L(NA) 08121E-D Addition


Section 2.2.2, Section 2.3.4, Section 4.6, Section 5.3

Change
Table of contents

* The publication number is given on the bottom left of the back cover.

This publication confers no industrial property rights or any rights of any other kind, nor does it confer any
patent licenses. Mitsubishi Electric Corporation cannot be held responsible for any problems involving
industrial property rights which may occur as a result of using the contents noted in this publication.

© 2008 MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC CORPORATION

10
Introduction
This publication describes case examples of transition from the large type MELSEC-A/QnA
Series, small type AnS/QnAS Series, A0J2(H) Series, and MELSECNET/MINI-S3 systems to
the MELSEC-Q Series.
Refer to these examples when considering system configurations and selecting modules during
a system upgrade.
This publication is intended to provide system configuration examples as a supplement to the
replacement handbooks. For specifications comparisons between A (large and small) and Q
Series or precautions for replacement, refer to the following replacement handbooks.

• Transition from MELSEC-A/QnA (Large Type) Series to Q Series Handbook (Fundamentals)


L(NA)08043ENG

• Transition from MELSEC-AnS/QnAS (Small Type) Series to Q Series Handbook (Fundamentals)


L(NA)08219ENG

• Transition from MELSEC-A/QnA (Large Type) Series to Q Series Handbook (Intelligent Function Modules)
L(NA)08046ENG

• Transition from MELSEC-AnS/QnAS (Small Type) Series to Q Series Handbook (Intelligent Function Modules)
L(NA)08220ENG

• Transition from MELSEC-A/QnA (Large Type), AnS/QnAS (Small Type) Series to Q Series Handbook (Network Modules)
L(NA)08048ENG

• Transition from MELSEC-A/QnA (Large Type), AnS/QnAS (Small Type) Series to Q Series Handbook (Communication Modules)
L(NA)08050ENG

• Transition from MELSEC-A0J2H Series to Q Series Handbook


L(NA)08060ENG

• Transition from MELSECNET/MINI-S3, A2C (I/O) to CC-Link Handbook


L(NA)08061ENG

• Transition from MELSEC-I/OLINK to CC-Link/LT Handbook


L(NA)08062ENG

• Transition from MELSEC-A/QnA Large Type Series to AnS/Q2AS Small Type Series Handbook
L(NA)08064ENG

• Transition of CPUs in MELSEC Redundant System Handbook (Transition from Q4ARCPU to QnPRHCPU)
L(NA)08117ENG

• Before using the products shown in the transition handbooks, catalogues, and transition examples, refer to
the relevant manuals and check the specifications, precautions, and restrictions.
For information on the products manufactured by Mitsubishi Electric Engineering Co., Ltd., Mitsubishi
Electric System & Service Co., Ltd., and other companies, refer to the relevant catalogues and check the
specifications, precautions, and restrictions.
The manuals and catalogues for our products, products manufactured by Mitsubishi Electric Engineering
Co., Ltd., and Mitsubishi Electric System & Service Co., Ltd. are shown in Appendix of each transition
handbook.
• For details on product compliance with the above standards, please contact your local Mitsubishi Electric
sales office or representative.
• Products shown in this handbook are subject to change without notice.

11
Contents
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS ‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥ 1
CONDITIONS OF USE FOR THE PRODUCT ‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥ 9
Revisions ‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥ 10
Introduction ‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥ 11
Contents ‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥ 12
Replacement options and module selection guide ‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥ 14
Part Ⅰ : Hardware ‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥ 17
1. Comparison of base mounting area ‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥ 18
1.1 Comparison of A/QnA (Large Type) Series and Q Series base unit mounting area ‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥ 18
1.2 Comparison of AnS/QnAS (Small Type) Series and Q Series base unit mounting area ‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥ 20
2. Utilizing external wiring ‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥ 22
2.1 Install terminal block converter module and terminal module externally ‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥ 22
2.1.1 Replace 32-point terminal block type module using connector/terminal block converter module ‥ 22
2.1.2 Replace 32-point contact output type module using “relay terminal module” ‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥ 24
2.1.3 Replace A/QnA (Large Type) Series 200 V AC input module AX21
[Use FA goods (manufactured by Mitsubishi Electric Engineering Co., Ltd.)] ‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥ 28
2.1.4 Replace AnS/QnAS (Small Type) Series 200 V AC input module A1SX20
[Use FA goods (manufactured by Mitsubishi Electric Engineering Co., Ltd.)] ‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥ 30
2.2 Upgrade to Q Series using Q Series large type base unit and I/O modules ‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥ 32
2.2.1 Q Series large base module, Q Series large I/O module ‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥ 32
2.2.2 Upgrade to Q Series modules using Q Series large type base unit ‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥ 36
2.2.3 Upgrade to MELSECNET/H (remote I/O network) system using Q Series large type base unit ‥ 38
2.3 Replacing with AnS size Q Series large module ‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥ 40
2.4 Replacement utilizing A (Large Type) upgrade tool (manufactured by Mitsubishi Electric
Engineering Co., Ltd.) ‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥ 41
2.4.1 Utilize A (Large Type) unit replacement upgrade tool ‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥ 41
2.4.2 Compatibility of Q Series large type base unit with the upgrade tool ‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥ 44
2.4.3 Select the DC input module replacement module ‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥ 45
2.5 Replacement utilizing A (Small Type) upgrade tool (manufactured by Mitsubishi Electric
Engineering Co., Ltd.) ‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥ 48
2.5.1 Utilize AnS/QnAS (Small Type) module replacement upgrade tool ‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥ 48
2.5.2 Compatibility of AnS size version Q Series large type base unit with the upgrade tool ‥‥‥‥‥‥ 51
2.6 Replace A0J2(H) systems with Q Series using existing wiring
[Use A0J2 upgrade tool (manufactured by Mitsubishi Electric System & Service Co., Ltd.)] ‥‥‥‥‥‥ 52
2.6.1 Replace A0J2(H) systems with Q Series using A0J2 upgrade tool ‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥ 56
2.6.2 Upgrade to MELSECNET/H (remote I/O network) system using A0J2 upgrade tool ‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥ 60
2.6.3 Replace MELSECNET/MINI compact type remote I/O modules with CC-Link ‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥ 62
3. Replacement utilizing existing modules ‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥ 64
3.1 Utilize existing A (Large Type)/AnS, QnAS (Small Type) modules ‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥ 64
3.1.1 Utilize A/QnA (Large Type) Series QA6�B extension base unit ‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥ 64
3.1.2 Utilize existing I/O modules and extension base unit with Q Series CPU
(Use QA conversion adapter) ‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥ 66
3.1.3 Utilize AnS/QnAS (Small Type) Series QA1S6�B extension base unit ‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥ 68
3.1.4 Utilize existing A (Large Type) and AnS (Small Type) module without changing I/O addresses ‥ 71
4. Replacement of MELSECNET Network System ‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥ 74
4.1 Replace MELSECNET(ΙΙ) with MELSECNET/10 ‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥ 74
4.1.1 Replace MELSECNET(ΙΙ) coaxial loop with MELSECNET/10 coaxial bus system while
retaining existing A Series CPUs ‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥ 74
4.1.2 Upgrade to MELSECNET/H network system utilizing existing MELSECNET/B
twisted pair cable ‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥ 76

12
4.2 Replace one of A Series stations with Q Series while retaining MELSECNET(ΙΙ) ‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥ 80
4.2.1 Replace A Series local station with Q Series ‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥ 80
4.2.2 Replace A Series master station with Q Series ‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥ 82
4.3 Replace MELSECNET containing a remote I/O station with MELSECNET/H ‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥ 84
4.4 Gradual replacement of MELSECNET/10 Remote I/O Net ‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥ 89
4.5 Replace MELSECNET/MINI(-S3) with CC-Link ‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥ 92
4.5.1 Replace A2CCPU with Q Series CPU and CC-Link (using A2C shape CC-Link I/O modules) ‥ 92
4.5.2 Replace MELSECNET/MINI(-S3) with CC-Link (using wiring conversion adapter) ‥‥‥‥‥‥‥ 94
4.5.3 Replace MELSECNET/MINI(-S3) remote I/O station (building block type: AJ72PT35)
with MELSECNET/H using the existing external wiring ‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥ 96
4.6 Replace MELSEC-I/OLINK with CC-Link/LT, AnyWire DB A20 ‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥ 100
5. Replacing with replacement dedicated modules ‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥ 102
5.1 Replace high-speed counter modules (AD61(S1)) with Q Series modules ‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥ 102
5.2 Replace DC input modules with 6 mA rated input current (QX41-S2, QX81-S2) ‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥ 108
5.3 Replace analog output positioning module (AD70/A1SD70) with Q Series ‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥ 110
6. Replacement utilizing spare part ‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥ 114
6.1 Use AnS (Small Type) modules as spare parts for existing A (Large Type) Series modules ‥‥‥ 114
6.1.1 Use AnS (Small Type) I/O modules as spare parts for A (Large Type) input/output modules ‥‥ 114
6.1.2 Use AnS (Small Type) module as spare parts for A (Large Type) computer link module ‥‥‥‥‥‥ 116
7. Replacing the Intelligent Module ‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥ 118
7.1 Replace analog I/O module with Q Series ‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥ 118
7.1.1 Replace A1S64ADA with Q Series ‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥ 118
7.1.2 Replace analog I/O module A1S66ADA with Q Series ‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥ 122
7.2 Replace position detection unit (A6�LS/A1S62LS) with Q Series ‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥ 126
Part Ⅱ : Programming ‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥ 127
8. Precautions for utilizing ACPU programs in QCPU ‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥ 128
8.1 Replace instructions with different QCPU instruction format
(excluding AnACPU/AnUCPU dedicated instructions) ‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥ 129
8.1.1 Instructions that use accumulators (A0, A1) ‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥ 129
8.1.2 ASCII code conversion instruction “ASC” ‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥ 133
8.2 Replace AnACPU/AnUCPU dedicated instructions ‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥ 136
8.3 Use index register as a 32-bit (2-word) device ‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥ 140
9. Utilize SFC programs (Replace MELSAP-ΙΙ with MELSAP3) ‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥ 144
Part Ⅲ : Application ‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥ 151
10. Replace AD75(P/M) with QD75(P/D/M/MH) while utilizing existing positioning
parameters and data ‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥ 152
11. Create a sample program for MELSECNET(ΙΙ) or MELSECNET/B link
refresh using A/QnA -> Q conversion support tool ‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥ 156
APPENDICES ‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥ 167
Appendix 1 Compatible CPUs for each network(MELSECNET(ΙΙ), MELSECNET/10, MELSECNET/H) ‥ 168
Appendix 1.1 System configuration for MELSECNET/10 and MELSECNET/H(PLC to PLC network) ‥ 168
Appendix 1.2 System configuration for existing MELSECNET(ΙΙ) in combination with Q Series CPU ‥ 169
Appendix 1.3 System configuration for MELSECNET/10 and MELSECNET/H(remote I/O network)‥‥ 169
Appendix 1.4 System configuration for redundant system network ‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥ 170
Warranty ‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥‥ 172

13
Replacement options and module selection guide
Specific modules are selected according to the transition procedure (gradually or simultaneously), module
configuration, and network configuration when replacing A/QnA Series modules with Q Series modules.
The following shows module replacement options and references.

Module replacement

Options References
Replacing
A0J2HCPU
Example: Section 2.6
To utilize existing Use A0J2 renewal tool
Replace A0J2(H) systems with Q Series
wiring manufactured by SC*1
using existing wiring
Transition from MELSEC-A0J2H Series
To replace with Select Q Series I/O
to Q Series Handbook
Q Series I/O modules modules
(L-08060ENG)

To replace special
function modules with Select Q Series modules
Q Series modules

Modifying/Replacing
A (Large Type)
Series modules
Transition from MELSEC-A/QnA
To replace with AnS (Small Select AnS (Small Type) Large Type Series to AnS/Q2AS
Type) Series modules Series modules Small Type Series Handbook
(L-08064ENG)
To add modules Modify/Replace modules Example: Section 6.1
to existing A (Large using A-A1S module Use AnS (Small Type) modules as spare
Type) Series system conversion adapter (A1ADP) parts for existing A (Large Type) Series
modules
Replacing
A (Large Type) Series
with Q Series
To only replace the CPU Replace modules using QA Example: Section 3.1.1
module and continue using extension base unit and Utilize A/QnA (Large Type) Series QA6�B
existing A (Large Type) QA conversion adapter extension base unit
Series modules Example: Section 3.1.2
Utilize existing I/O modules and extension
base unit with Q Series CPU
(Use QA conversion adapter)

To replace A (Large Type) Replace modules using Example: Section 2.2


Series 32-point terminal Q Series large type base unit Upgrade to Q Series using Q Series large
block type modules and I/O modules type base unit and I/O modules
without changing the
wiring configuration Example: Section 2.2
Replace modules using upgrade
Upgrade to Q Series using Q Series large
tool manufactured by MEE*2
type base unit and I/O modules
Example: Section 2.4.2
Compatibility of Q Series large type
base unit with the upgrade tool

To replace modules Replace modules using Example: Section 2.1


when it is difficult to terminal block converter Install terminal block converter module
use the Q Series module and terminal module and terminal module externally
large type base unit
Replace modules using FA
goods manufactured by MEE*2

Transition from MELSEC-A/QnA


To replace all modules (Large Type) Series to Q Series
with Q Series modules Select Q Series modules Handbook (Fundamentals)
(L-08043ENG)

*1: SC: Mitsubishi Electric System & Service Co., Ltd.


*2: MEE: Mitsubishi Electric Engineering Co., Ltd.

14
Options References
Replacing AnS
(Small Type) Series
with Q Series
To only replace the CPU Example: Section 3.1.3
module and continue Replace modules using Utilize AnS/QnAS (Small Type) Series
using the existing AnS QA1S extension base QA1S6�B extension base unit
(Small Type) module

To mount Q Series base Replace modules using


Example: Section 2.5.1
unit using existing AnS AnS (Small Type) Series
Utilize AnS/QnAS (Small Type) module
(Small Type) base unit upgrade tool manufactured
replacement upgrade tool
mounting holes by MEE*2

To replace existing AnS


(Small Type) 16-point
terminal block module
without changing the
wiring configuration

To replace modules when Replace modules using FA Example: Section 2.1.4


it is difficult to use the Q goods manufactured by Replace AnS/QnAS (Small Type) Series
Series large type base unit MEE*2 200 V AC input module A1SX20
[Use FA goods (manufactured by
Mitsubishi Electric Engineering Co., Ltd.)]
To replace all modules Transition from MELSEC-AnS/QnAS
Select Q Series modules
with Q Series modules (Small Type) Series to Q Series Handbook
(Fundamentals) (L(NA)08219ENG)

Network replacement

Replacing
MELSECNET/MINI
(S3) with CC-Link
Example: Section 4.5.1
To replace networks using Replace network using A2C
Replace A2CCPU with Q Series CPU
existing external wiring shape I/O modules
and CC-Link
Example: Section 4.5.2
Replace network using
To replace A2CCPU Replace MELSECNET/MINI(-S3) with
wiring conversion adapter
CC-Link

To replace networks Transition from MELSECNET/MINI-S3,


when it is difficult to
use existing wiring Select CC-Link modules A2C(I/O) to CC-Link Handbook
configuration (L-08061ENG)

To replace Example: Section 2.6.3


Use A0J2 renewal tool Replace MELSECNET/MINI compact type
compact type remote
manufactured by SC*1 remote I/O modules with CC-Link
I/O modules

To replace building Example: Section 4.5.3


Replace with MELSECNET/H
block type remote Replace MELSECNET/MINI(-S3) remote
remote I/O network
I/O modules I/O station with MELSECNET/H using the
existing external wiring

*1: SC: Mitsubishi Electric System & Service Co., Ltd.


*2: MEE: Mitsubishi Electric Engineering Co., Ltd.

15
Network replacement

Options References
Replacing
Replacing
MELSECNET(ΙΙ)
MELSEC-I/OLINK

To replace networks Example: Section 4.6


without changing Replace with CC-Link/LT Replace MELSEC-I/OLINK with CC-Link/LT,
existing addresses AnyWire DB A20

To replace networks Example: Section 4.6


Replace with AnyWire
using existing Replace MELSEC-I/OLINK with CC-Link/LT,
DB A20
communication cables AnyWire DB A20

Replacing
MELSECNET(ΙΙ)

To replace CPU modules Replace modules using Example: Section 4.2


while retaining the existing MELSECNET(ΙΙ) local station Replace one of A Series stations with
MELSECNET(ΙΙ) data link modules Q Series while retaining MELSECNET(ΙΙ)

To replace with Example: Section 4.1.1


Upgrade gradually to Replace MELSECNET(ΙΙ) coaxial loop
MELSECNET/10 using
Q Series CPU modules with MELSECNET/10 coaxial bus system
existing cables
while retaining existing A Series CPUs
Transition to MELSECNET/H Example: Section 4.1.2
using MELSECNET/B twisted Upgrade to MELSECNET/H network
pair cables system utilizing existing MELSECNET/B
twisted pair cable

To replace networks Replace networks using Transition from MELSEC-A/QnA


containing a remote MELSECNET/H PLC to PLC (Large Type) Series to Q Series
I/O station network and remote I/O network Handbook (Network Modules)
(L-08048ENG)
Change from remote I/O station Example: Chapter 4.3
to normal station and replace Replace MELSECNET containing a remote
as one single network I/O station with MELSECNET/H

To gradually replace Use a gateway set to Transition from MELSEC-A/QnA


networks using existing configure networks with (Large Type) Series to Q Series
MELSECNET(ΙΙ) and relay stations Handbook (Network Modules)
MELSECNET/10
(L-08048ENG)

This section describes the main replacement options. If multiple options are selected or other options
are needed, comprehensive consideration is required to configure the system.

16
Part Ⅰ: Hardware

17
1.1 Comparison of A/QnA (Large Type) Series and Q Series base unit mounting area

1. Comparison of base mounting area


1.1 Comparison of A/QnA (Large Type) Series and Q Series base unit mounting area
When upgrading existing A/QnA systems, there are cases where the number of modules increases due to
specification differences. For instance, to replace an A/QnA (Large Type) Series 32-point terminal block type I/O
module, two Q Series 16-point terminal block type I/O modules are used. Despite increase in the number of I/O
slots and extension base stages, the Q Series footprint is smaller than that of the A/QnA (Large Type) Series.
The following example shows a comparison of the mounting areas when the A/QnA (Large Type) Series system
is upgraded to the Q Series.

Solution and Benefit


When replacing each 32-point terminal block type module with two 16-point terminal block type
modules, an additional extension base unit is required due to an increase in the number of modules.
However, the Q Series system fits inside the existing control panel because it is compact in size.

A. When the A/QnA (Large Type) Series main base unit A35B and the A65B extension base unit are replaced
382
Q38B/Q68B
30
80 A35B 0 0 0 0 0
1 1 1 1 1

98
2 2 2 2 2
3 3 3 3 3
4 4 4 4 4
5 5 5 5 5
6 6 6 6 6
7 7 7 7 7
8 8 8 8 8
9 9 9 9 9
A A A A A
B B B B B
C C C C C
D D D D D
E E E E E
F F F F F

40
250 30

Replace
0 0 0 0 0
1 1 1 1 1

98
2 2 2 2 2
3 3 3 3 3
4 4 4 4 4
5 5 5 5 5
6 6 6 6 6
7 7 7 7 7
8 8 8 8 8
9 9 9 9 9
A A A A A
B B B B B
C C C C C
D D D D D
E E E E E
F F F F F

50 40
30
80 A65B 0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1

98
2 2 2 2 2
3 3 3 3 3
4 4 4 4 4
5 5 5 5 5
6 6 6 6 6
7 7 7 7 7
8 8 8 8 8
9 9 9 9 9
A A A A A
B B B B B
C C C C C
D D D D D
E E E E E
F F F F F

40
250 20 328 5

Downsized
50

352
Unit: mm

Q38B/Q68B

A35B
Base unit size comparsion

Tip
The A/QnA (Large Type) Series main base unit and extension base unit differ in size:
• A35B main base unit: 382 mm (W) x 250 mm (H)
• A65B extension base unit: 352 mm (W) x 250 mm (H)

Whereas the Q Series main base unit and extension base unit are the same size:
• Q38B main base unit/Q68B extension base unit: 328 mm (W) x 98 mm (H)

Even with the extra I/O slots and base units, the base unit installation area for Q Series is smaller than that for
A/QnA (Large Type) Series.

18
1.1 Comparison of A/QnA (Large Type) Series and Q Series base unit mounting area

B. When the A/QnA (Large Type) Series main base unit A38B and the A68B extension base unit are replaced
480
Q312B/Q612B
30
80 A38B 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1

98
2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2
3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3
4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4
5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5
6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6
7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7
8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8
9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9
A A A A A A A A A
B B B B B B B B B
C C C C C C C C C
D D D D D D D D D
E E E E E E E E E
F F F F F F F F F

40
250 30
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1

Replace 98
2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2
3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3
4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4
5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5
6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6
7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7
8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8
9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9
A A A A A A A A A
B B B B B B B B B
C C C C C C C C C
D D D D D D D D D
E E E E E E E E E
F F F F F F F F F

50 40
30
80 A68B 0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1

98
2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2
3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3
4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4
5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5
6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6
7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7
8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8
9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9
A A A A A A A A A
B B B B B B B B B
C C C C C C C C C
D D D D D D D D D
E E E E E E E E E
F F F F F F F F F

40
250 20 439 5

Downsized
50

466
Unit: mm

Q312B/Q612B

A38B

Base unit size comparsion

Tip
The A/QnA (Large Type) Series main base unit and extension base unit differ in size:
• A38B main base unit: 480 mm (W) x 250 mm (H)
• A68B extension base unit: 466 mm (W) x 250 mm (H)

Whereas the Q Series main base unit and extension base unit are the same size:
• Q312B main base unit/Q612B extension base unit: 439 mm (W) x 98 mm (H)

Even with the extra I/O slots and base units, the base unit installation area for Q Series is smaller than that for
A/QnA (Large Type) Series.

19
1.2 Comparison of AnS/QnAS (Small Type) Series and Q Series base unit mounting area

1.2 Comparison of AnS/QnAS (Small Type) Series and Q Series base unit mounting area
The Q Series is compact, and has a smaller mounting area.
It can be mounted within the AnS/QnAS (Small Type) mounting area.
The following example shows a comparison of the mounting areas when the AnS/QnAS (Small Type) Series
system is upgraded to the Q Series.

Solution and Benefit


Using the “AnS to Q Series conversion adapter” (manufactured by Mitsubishi Electric Engineering
Co., Ltd.), the 16-point terminal block type module can fit into the existing space without changing
the wiring.

A. When the AnS/QnAS (Small Type) Series main base unit A1S35B and the A1S65B extension
base unit are replaced

325 328

30 A1S35B Q38B/Q68B 30

0 0 0 0 0
1 1 1 1 1
2 2 2 2 2

98
3 3 3 3 3
4 4 4 4 4
5 5 5 5 5
6 6 6 6 6

130
7 7 7 7 7
8 8 8 8 8
9 9 9 9 9
A A A A A
B B B B B
C C C C C
D D D D D
E E E E E
F F F F F

40
30
Q35B/Q65B 30
30 A1S65B Replace
0 0 0 0 0
1 1 1 1 1
2 2 2 2 2

98
3 3 3 3 3
4 4 4 4 4
5 5 5 5 5
6 6 6 6 6
7 7 7 7 7
8 8 8 8 8
9 9 9 9 9
A A A A A
B B B B B
C C C C C

130
D D D D D
E E E E E
F F F F F

40

20 245 5
30

Unit: mm
315

Q38B Q312B
Q35B/Q65B Q38B/Q68B
/Q68B /Q612B

A1S35B A1S38B

Base unit size comparsion

20
1.2 Comparison of AnS/QnAS (Small Type) Series and Q Series base unit mounting area

Existing base unit Replacement base unit


Remarks
Model Outline dimensions Model Outline dimensions

A1S35B 325(W)×130(H) Q35B 245(W)×98(H) Width is 80 mm narrower


Q38B 328(W)×98(H) Width is 3 mm wider

A1S38B 430(W)×130(H) Q38B 328(W)×98(H) Width is 102 mm narrower


Q312B 439(W)×98(H) Width is 9 mm wider

A1S65B 315(W)×130(H) Q65B 245(W)×98(H) Width is 70 mm narrower


Q68B 328(W)×98(H) Width is 13 mm wider

A1S68B 420(W)×130(H) Q68B 328(W)×98(H) Width is 92 mm narrower


Q612B 439(W)×98(H) Width is 19 mm wider

Tip
The AnS /QnA (Small Type) Series main base unit and extension base unit differ in size:
• A1S35B main base unit: 325 mm (W) x 130 mm (H)
• A1S65B extension base unit: 315 mm (W) x 130 mm (H)

Whereas the Q Series main base unit and extension base unit are the same size:
• Q38B main base unit/Q68B extension base unit: 328 mm (W) x 98 mm (H)

The width will increase if the number of modules increases, i.e., A1S35B to Q68B will increase 3 mm, and
A1S38B to Q312B will increase by 9 mm.
However, this increase can be handled. Confirm the in-panel layout and space and determine whether the
extra modules can be mounted.

21
2.1 Install terminal block converter module and terminal module externally

2. Utilizing external wiring


2.1 Install terminal block converter module and terminal module externally
2.1.1 Replace 32-point terminal block type module using connector/terminal block converter module

Solution and Benefit


• The connector/terminal block converter module can support up to 2mm2 wires, allowing the use
of existing thick wires without modification.
• Using a connector/terminal block converter module, an existing 32-point terminal block type
module can be replaced with a 32-point connector type module without increasing the number of
modules.

The following is an example of replacing an A/QnA (Large Type) Series system that contains 32-point terminal
block type input modules (AX41).
● Instructions
Replace AX41 with QX41, and connect the connector/terminal block converter module.
If QX40 is used instead of QX41, two modules are required to replace each AX41. Also, if existing wires are
thicker than the applicable wire size (0.75 mm2), wiring modifications may be necessary.

A. System configuration example


Current configuration After replacement
W=382 mm W=328 mm
Q01UCPU

QX41

QX41

QX41

QX41

QX42
Q61P

QY10

QY10

QY10
A2NCPU

H=98 mm

(16)

(16)

(16)
A61P

AX41

AX41

AX41

AX41

AX42

H=250 mm

Q38B
*1 *1
A35B X00... X20... X40... X60... X80...
W=352 mm Replace *1 *1

W=328 mm
A61P

AY13

AY13

AY13

AY13

AY13

H=250 mm
Empty
Q61P

QY10

QY10

QY10

QY10

QY10

QY10

QY10

H=98 mm
(16)

(16)

(16)

(16)

(16)

(16)

(16)

A65B YC0... YE0... Y100... Y120... Y140... Q68B


*1: Connector/terminal block converter module (A6TBXY36)

B. Module selection example


Product name Existing model Replacemant model
Power supply module A61P 2 Q61P 2
CPU module A2NCPU 1 Q01UCPU 1
Main base unit A35B 1 Q38B 1
Extension base unit A65B 1 Q68B 1
Extension cable AC06B 1 QC06B 1
Input module AX41 4 QX41 4
Connector/terminal block converter module N/A - A6TBXY36 4
Connector/terminal block converter module cable N/A - AC�TB 4
Input module AX42 1 QX42 1
Output module AY13 5 QY10 10

22
2.1 Install terminal block converter module and terminal module externally

(1) Connector/terminal block converter module


Width
(All models have the same height and depth)
A6TBXY36 120 mm

D=52 mm
A6TBXY54 155 mm
A6TBX70 190 mm

W=120 mm
H=78.5 mm

A6TBXY36 (for 32 points)

(2) Specifications
Applicable
Model Outline Weight wire size Applicable crimping terminal Applicable model

A6TBXY36 For positive common input modules 0.4 kg Q Series: QX41, QX41-S1, QX42, QX42-S1, QY41H, QY41P,
and sink output modules QY42P, QY82P, QH42P, QX41Y41P
(standard type) AnS Series: A1SX41, A1SX41-S1, A1SX41-S2, A1SX42,
A1SX42-S1, A1SX42-S2, A1SX82-S1,
A1SY41, A1SY40P, A1SY42, A1SY42P, A1SY82,
A1SH42, A1SH42-S1
A6TBXY54 For positive common input modules 0.5 kg A Series: AX42, AX42-S1, AY42, AY42-S1, AY42-S3,
and sink output modules AY42-S4, AH42
(2-wire type) CC-Link: AJ65SBTCF1-32D, AJ65SBTCF1-32T,
AJ65BTC1-32D, AJ65BTC1-32T
1.25-3.5 (JIS) MELSECNET/MINI: AJ35TC1-32D, AJ35TC1-32T
A6TBX70 For positive common input modules 0.6 kg 1.25-YS3A (J.S.T.) Q Series: QX41, QX41-S1, QX42, QX42-S1, QH42P, QX41Y41P
(3-wire type) V1.25-M3 (J.S.T.) AnS Series: A1SX41, A1SX41-S1, A1SX41-S2, A1SX42,
A1SX42-S1, A1SX42-S2, A1SX82-S1,
0.75 to V1.25-YS3A (J.S.T.)
A1SH42, A1SH42-S1
2 mm2 2-3.5 (JIS) A Series: AX42, AX42-S1, AH42
2-YS3A (J.S.T.) CC-Link: AJ65SBTCF1-32D, AJ65BTC1-32D
V2-S3 (J.S.T.) MELSECNET/MINI: AJ35TC1-32D
A6TBX36-E For negative common input modules 0.4 kg V2-YS3A (J.S.T.) Q Series: QX81
(standard type) AnS Series: A1SX81, A1SX81-S2
A6TBX54-E For negative common input modules 0.5 kg A Series: AX82
(2-wire type)
A6TBX70-E For negative common input modules 0.6 kg
(3-wire type)
A6TBY36-E For source output modules 0.4 kg Q Series: QY81P
(standard type) AnS Series: A1SY81
A6TBY54-E For source output modules 0.5 kg A Series: AY82EP
(2-wire type)

(3) Cables
Model Outline Weight Applicable model

AC05TB 0.5 m, for sink type modules 0.17 kg A6TBXY36

AC10TB 1 m, for sink type modules 0.23 kg A6TBXY54

A6TBX70
AC20TB 2 m, for sink type modules 0.37 kg

AC30TB 3 m, for sink type modules 0.51 kg

AC50TB 5 m, for sink type modules 0.76 kg

AC80TB 8 m, for sink type modules (common current: 0.5 A or lower) 1.2 kg

AC100TB 10 m, for sink type modules (common current: 0.5 A or lower) 1.5 kg

AC05TB-E 0.5 m, for source type modules 0.17 kg A6TBX36-E

AC10TB-E 1 m, for source type modules 0.23 kg A6TBY36-E

A6TBX54-E
AC20TB-E 2 m, for source type modules 0.37 kg
A6TBY54-E
AC30TB-E 3 m, for source type modules 0.51 kg
A6TBX70-E
AC50TB-E 5 m, for source type modules 0.76 kg

23
2.1 Install terminal block converter module and terminal module externally

2.1.2 Replace 32-point contact output type module using “relay terminal module”
Solution and Benefit
• Using the relay terminal modules, a large type A (Large Type) Series 32-point contact output
module can be replaced while maintaining 8 points/common.
• A wide variety of compatible wire sizes are available using the relay terminal module.
A (Large Type) Series 32-point contact output module AY13: Max. 2 mm2
Relay terminal module: Max. 1.25 mm2
Q Series 16-point contact output module QY10: Max. 0.75 mm2
• Replacement is possible without the need of additional modules because a module mounted on
the base unit becomes compatible with 32-point connector type modules through the use of the
"connector/terminal block converter module".

The following is an example of replacing contact output modules (AY13) with transistor output modules (QY41P)
and externally converting transistor outputs into contact outputs.

● Instructions
Replace AY13 with QY41P and connect the relay terminal modules to convert to contact outputs.
With this method, the system can be upgraded without increasing the number of modules on the base unit.
Also, 8 points/common, the same specification as that of the AY13, can be maintained.

A. System configuration example

Current configuration After replacement


Q01UCPU

QX41

QX41

QX41

QX41

QX42
Q61P
A2NCPU
A61P

AX41

AX41

AX41

AX41

AX42

A35B X00... X20... X40... X60... X80... Replace


QY41P

QY41P

QY41P

QY41P

QY41P
Q61P
A61P

AY13

AY13

AY13

AY13

AY13

A65B YC0... YE0... Y100... Y120... Y140...

QY41P

8 points/common
(the same specification
as that of AY13)

Dedicated cable
(AC�TE)

Reray terminal module Reray terminal module

16-point relay terminal module x 2


(A6TE2-16SRN)

24
2.1 Install terminal block converter module and terminal module externally

B. Module selection example


Product name Existing model Replacement model
Power supply module A61P 2 Q61P 2
CPU module A2NCPU 1 Q01UCPU 1
Main base unit A35B 1 Q38B* 1
Extension base unit A65B 1 Q68B 1
Extension cable AC06B 1 QC06B 1
Input module AX41 4 QX41-S2 4
Connector/terminal block converter module N/A - A6TBXY36 4
Cable (for connector/terminal block converter module) N/A - AC�TB 4
Input module AX42 1 QX42 1
Output module AY13 5 QY41P 5
Relay terminal module N/A - A6TE2-16SRN 10
Cable (for relay terminal module) N/A - AC06TE 5
* The Q312 can be used if the control panel is wide enough. With the Q312, the I/O modules can be mounted on one base unit,
eliminating the need for the Q68B extension base unit, QC06B extension cable, and one Q61P power supply module.

C. Relay terminal module (A6TE2-16SRN) D. External dimensions


Unit: mm

52.6

Note: The relay terminal module can function as a relay


terminal block while performing contact outputs.

E. Cables
The connection cables compatible with A6TE2-16SRN are shown below. B-side: Second half
16 pts. (Y10 to Y1F)
m
L 0m
Model Length (L) 35

AC06TE 0.6 m
B
AC10TE 1m A

AC30TE 3m 35
0m
m
AC50TE 5m
A-side: First half
AC100TE 10 m 16 pts. (Y0 to YF)

25
2.1 Install terminal block converter module and terminal module externally

F. Specifications comparison between AY13 and A6TE2-16SRN ○: Compatible, △: Partially changed


Compati-
Item AY13 A6TE2-16SRN Remarks
bility
Use two A6TE2-16SRN modules
Number of output points 32 points 16 points △
when using more than 16 points.

The isolation method differs, but the


Isolation method Photocoupler Relay △
isolation performance is equivalent.

Rated switching 24 V DC/2 A (resistive load)/point, 24 V DC/2 A (resistive load)/point,


240 V AC/2 A (cos Ф =1)/point, 240 V AC/2 A (cos Ф =1)/point, ○
voltage/current
5 A/common 8 A/common
Minimum switching load 5 V DC 1 mA 5 V DC 1 mA ○

Maximum switching 264 V AC 264 V AC



voltage 125 V DC 125 V DC

Response ON to OFF 10 ms or less 10 ms or less ○


time OFF to ON 12 ms or less 12 ms or less ○

Mechanical 20 million times or more 20 million times or more ○

Rated switching voltage/current Rated switching voltage/current



load: 200,000 times or more load: 100,000 times or more The electrical life of
Life 200 V AC 1.5 A, 240 V AC 1 A 200 V AC 1.5 A, 240 V AC 1 A the A6TE2-16SRN is half of
Electrical (cos Ф =0.7): 200,000 times or more (cos Ф =0.7): 100,000 times or more the AY13's life. However, the relay
200 V AC 0.7 A, 240 V AC 0.5 A 200 V AC 0.7 A, 240 V AC 0.5 A for the A6TE2-16SRN can be

(cos Ф =0.35): 200,000 times or more (cos Ф =0.35): 100,000 times or more
replaced.
24 V DC 1 A, 100 V DC 0.1 A 24 V DC 1 A, 100 V DC 0.1 A
(L/R=7 ms): 200,000 times or more (L/R=7 ms): 100,000 times or more

Maximum switching
3600 times/hour 3600 times/hour ○
frequency
8 points/common 8 points/common
Common terminal
(common terminals: (common terminals: ○
arrangement TB9, TB18, TB27, TB36) TB19, TB21)

Operation indicator ON indication (LED) ON indication (LED) ○

24 V DC ±10% 24 V DC ±10%
Voltage ○
External Ripple voltage: 4 Vp-p or less Ripple voltage: 4 Vp-p or less The supplied current value will be
power larger.
supply 290 mA 350 mA
Current △
(TYP. 24 V DC, all points ON) (TYP. 24 V DC, all points ON)

38-point terminal block 38-point screw terminal block


External connections △
connector (M3 × 6 screws) (M3 screw) (M3 × 6 screws)

Applicable wire size 0.75 to 2 mm2 0.75 to 1.25 mm2 △


Wiring modification is required.
R1.25-3, R1.25-MS3,
Applicable crimping R1.25-3, R2-3, R1.25-B3A, R1.25-C3A,

terminal RAV1.25-3, RAV2-3 RAV1.25-3, RAV1.25-MS3,
RAV1.25-B3A

26
MEMO

27
2.1 Install terminal block converter module and terminal module externally

2.1.3 Replace A/QnA (Large Type) Series 200 V AC input module AX21
[Use FA goods (manufactured by Mitsubishi Electric Engineering Co., Ltd.)]

Solution and Benefit


• Use the Q Series large type input module QX21L to replace the modules without changing the
wiring.
Note that if the Q Series large type base unit cannot be used because of space limitations in the
panel or because of the module configuration, etc., replacements can be completed easily by
using the FA goods.
• A dedicated cable is available to connect the programmable controller with the FA goods, so
there’s no need to prepare cables when making a replacement.

FA goods
A variety of FA goods, including a terminal block connector conversion module, I/O type converter (AC input ->
DC input conversion, DC output signal -> relay output conversion, etc.), are available. Use these convenient
products as relays, signal conversions and a means to reduce wiring when compatible modules are not available
for replacing from the A/QnA (Large Type) Series to the Q Series.

The following is an example of replacing the A (Large Type) I/O module with the Q Series using FA goods.
● Instruction
(1) Using the FA goods, convert the 200 V AC input into 24 V DC, and lead it in with QX41, etc.
(2) The external wiring will change, but program does not need to be changed since the I/O address is the same.
(3) The following FA goods are used.
Product name Model External connection Remarks
(1) 200 V AC input module insulated with
photo coupler
FA-TH16X200A31L
(2) Input module on programmable controller side
200 V AC photo
16-point/common QX41, QX42, QH42 and QX41Y41P
coupler insulated
2-wire type (3) CC-Link module
input module
AJ65SBTCF1-32D
(4) Connection cable
FA-CBL���FM2V and FA-CBL���FM2LV

A. System configuration example


Current configuration New configuration after replacement

AX21 AX21 QX41 QX41


(1) (2) I/O I/O I/O
(1) (2) I/O I/O I/O Q61P Q01U
A61P A2N module module module Replace CPU module module module
CPU
32points 32points
X000~ X020~ Q35B
A35B (200 V AC 32-point input for AX21)
FA-TH16X200A31L FA-TH16X200A31L
FA-TH16X200A31L FA-TH16X200A31L

B. Application (CC-Link input module) 200 V AC input

AJ65SBTCF1-32D
FA-TH16X200A31L
200 V AC input
FA-TH16X200A31L

CC-Link FA-CBL06FM2LV
other stations
28
2.1 Install terminal block converter module and terminal module externally

• Connection cable
Shape Model Cable length
FA-CBL06FM2LV 0.6m
FA-CBL10FM2LV 1.0m
FA-CBL20FM2LV 2.0m
FA-CBL30FM2LV 3.0m
FA-CBL50FM2LV 5.0m
FA-CBL100FM2LV 10.0m

• Module external dimensions


175
2-φ8
10 155 10
2-φ4.5 26.9
4.75

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B C D E

27.5
FA-TH16X100A31
AC100V Input module
59.5

71.5

35.5

ck

12
lo
e
pl
m
Si
5
7.26

53.4

8.5
7.62 12
DIN rail
Unit: mm

C. Module selection example


Product name Existing model Replacement model
Power supply module A61P 1 Q61P 1
CPU module A2NCPU 1 Q01UCPU 1
Main base unit A35B 1 Q35B 1
Input module AX21 2 QX41 or QX42 2/1
FA goods : Input module N/A − FA-TH16X200A31L 4

N/A FA-CBL��FM2V
Connection cable − 2
FA-CBL���FM2LV

Tip
• The FA goods input module has a function to convert 200 V AC input signal into 24 V DC, so select a 24 V
DC input connector type module for the programmable controller side input module.
• The following products are available for the FA goods.
Triac large capacity (1 A/point) output module
Transistor large capacity (2 A/point) output module
Common multi-point I/O module
The FA goods can be used when replacement using the Q Series large type I/O module conversion adapter
is difficult.
For details on the FA goods manufactured by Mitsubishi Electric Engineering Co., Ltd., please contact your
local Mitsubishi sales office or representative.
• To replace using existing external wiring terminal block, use the Q Series large type input module QX21L.
Refer to “2.2 Upgrade to Q Series using Q Series large type base unit and I/O modules” for details.

29
2.1 Install terminal block converter module and terminal module externally

2.1.4 Replace AnS/QnAS (Small Type) Series 200 V AC input module A1SX20
[Use FA goods (manufactured by Mitsubishi Electric Engineering Co., Ltd.)]

Solution and Benefit


• An increase in modules and changes to address can be handled easily by using FA goods.
• A dedicated cable is available to connect the programmable controller with the FA goods, so
there’s no need to prepare cables when making a replacement.

The following is an example of replacing the AnS/QnAS (Small Type) I/O module with the Q Series using FA
goods.
When replacing the AnS/QnAS (Small Type) 200 V AC input module A1SX20 (16-input points, 16-occupied
points), the Q Series 200 V AC input module is QX28 (8-point input, 16-occupied points), so the number of
modules will increase, and the address will change.
By using the FA goods, the modules can be replaced without increasing the number of modules or changing the
address.

● Instruction
(1) Using the FA goods, convert the 200 V AC input into 24 V DC, and lead it in with QX40.
(2) The external wiring will change, but program does not need to be changed since the I/O address is
the same.
(3) The following FA goods are used.
Product name Model External connection Remarks

FA-TH16X200A31L (1) 200 V AC input module insulated with


200 V AC photo photo coupler
16-point/common
coupler insulated (2) Input module QX40 on programmable
2-wire type
input module controller side
(3) Connection cable FA-CBL���TMV20

A. System configuration example

Current configuration New configuration after replacement

QX40QX40 I/O I/O I/O


A1S A2SH A1S A1S I/O I/O I/O Q61P Q01U
CPU modulemodulemodule
61PN CPU X20 X20 module module module Replace
Q35B
A1S35B
FA-CBL06TMV20 FA-CBL06TMV20

FA-TH16X200A31L FA-TH16X200A31L

200 V AC input

30
2.1 Install terminal block converter module and terminal module externally

• Connection cable
Shape Model Cable length
FA-CBL06TMV20 0.6m
FA-CBL10TMV20 1.0m
FA-CBL20TMV20 2.0m
FA-CBL30TMV20 3.0m
FA-CBL50TMV20 5.0m
FA-CBL100TMV20 10.0m

B. Module selection example


Product name Existing model Replacement model
Power supply module A1S61PN 1 Q61P 1
CPU module A2SHCPU 1 Q01UCPU 1
Main base unit A1S35B 1 Q35B 1
Input module A1SX20 2 QX40 2
FA goods N/A − FA-TH16X20031L 2
Connection cable N/A − FA-CBL���TMV20 2

Tip
• The FA goods input module has a function to convert the 200 V AC input signal into 24 V DC. When
replacing a 16-point terminal block type, select a 24 V DC input terminal block type module for the
programmable controller side input module. In addition, select a cable that matches the module type.
• The following products are available for the FA goods.
Triac large capacity (1 A/point) output module
Transistor large capacity (2 A/point) output module
Common multi-point I/O module
The FA goods can be used when replacement using a conversion adapter is difficult.
For details on the FA goods manufactured by Mitsubishi Electric Engineering Co., Ltd., please contact your
local Mitsubishi sales office or representative.

31
2.2 Upgrade to Q Series using Q Series large type base unit and I/O modules

2.2 Upgrade to Q Series using Q Series large type base unit and I/O modules
2.2.1 Q Series large base module, Q Series large I/O module
Solution and Benefit
• The Q Series large type I/O modules allow the use of existing A/QnA (Large Type) Series 32-point
I/O wiring, eliminating the need for rewiring.
• Performance specifications of the Q Series large type I/O modules are equivalent to those of the
A/QnA (Large Type) Series.
• The hole size and pitch of the Q Series large type base units are the same as those of the A/QnA
(Large Type) Series, eliminating the need of making new mounting holes.
• The Q Series large type I/O modules and standard Q Series modules can be mounted together on
the Q Series large type base unit. For the standard Q Series modules, existing A/QnA (Large
Type) Series connectors or terminal blocks can be utilized without modification by using a
conversion adapter (upgrade tool) manufactured by Mitsubishi Electric Engineering Co., Ltd.

Wired terminal blocks of the existing A (Large Type) Series I/O modules can be mounted directly without
modifying the external wiring.
Q Series large type
base unit Q Series large type
I/O module

Mount directly

Remove the wired


terminal block
from the existing
I/O module

Upgrade tool (Conversion adapter)


manufactured by Mitsubishi Electric
Engineering Co., Ltd.

Mount directly

Mount a standard Q Series


power supply module and
CPU module Q Series large type
I/O module Remove the wired
terminal block
Q Series module from the existing
I/O module

Q Series module

Q Series large type blank cover (QG69L)


(To mount a standard Q Series module
on a large type base unit)

A. Q Series large type base unit options


Product name Model Outline
Q38BL 8 slots, 1 power supply module required, Q Series large type I/O module mountable
Main base unit
Q35BL 5 slots, 1 power supply module required, Q Series large type I/O module mountable
Q68BL 8 slots, 1 power supply module required, Q Series large type I/O module mountable
Extension base
Q65BL 5 slots, 1 power supply module required, Q Series large type I/O module mountable
unit
Q55BL 5 slots, power supply module not required, Q Series large type I/O module mountable

32
2.2 Upgrade to Q Series using Q Series large type base unit and I/O modules

B. Q Series large type I/O module options


Model
Product name Existing A (Large Type) Q Series Outline
Series module module
32 points, 100 to 120 V AC, rated input current:10 mA (100 V AC, 60 Hz),
AX11 QX11L response time: 15 ms or less (OFF to ON), 25 ms or less (ON to OFF),
32 points/common, 38-point terminal block
Input module
32 points, 200 to 240 V AC, rated input current: 10 mA (220 V AC 60 Hz),
AX21 QX21L response time: 15 ms or less (OFF to ON), 25 ms or less (ON to OFF),
32 points/common, 38-point terminal block
AY10A 16-point contact output, 24 V DC/240 V AC, 2 A/point, 16 A/all points,
QY11AL All points independent common, 38-point terminal block,
AY11A Surge suppressor (Varistor 387 to 473 V)

AY13 QY13L
32-point contact output, 24 V DC/240 V AC, 2 A/point, 5 A/common,
Output module 8 points/common, 38-point terminal block
AY23 QY23L
32-point triac output, 100 to 240 V AC, 0.6 A/point, 2.4 A/common,
8 points/common, 38-point terminal block
AY51 32-point transistor output 12 to 24 V DC, 0.5 A/point, 4 A/common,
QY51PL 16-point/common protection function (overheat protection function,
AY51-S1 overload protection function), 38-point terminal block
Large type Blank cover for mounting existing Q Series module on the Q Series large
N/A QG69L
blank cover type base unit

C. Conversion adapter (upgrade tool) options [manufactured by Mitsubishi Electric Engineering Co., Ltd.]
Model External connections
Product name
Existing A (Large Type) Series module Q Series module Conversion adapter (Q Series)
AX10 QX10 ERNT-AQTX10
QX40
AX40
QX40-S1 Terminal block
ERNT-AQTX40
AX70 QX70 (18 points)
AX50, AX50-S1 QX50
Input module AX80 QX80 ERNT-AQTX80
AX41
QX41, QX41-S2
AX31-S1 FCN connector
ERNT-AQTX41
AX41-S1 QX41-S1 (40P plug)
AX71 QX71
AX81, AX81-S1 QX81, QX81-S2 ERNT-AQTX81 D-Sub connector (37P)
AY10
AY11
QY10 ERNT-AQTY10
AY11E
AY11EEU
Terminal block
AY22 QY22 ERNT-AQTY22
(18 points)
Output module AY40, AY40P QY40P
ERNT-AQTY40
AY70 QY70
AY50 QY50 ERNT-AQTY50
AY80 QY80 ERNT-AQTY80
AY41, AY41P QY41P FCN connector
ERNT-AQTY41
AY71 QY71 (40P plug)
AY81, AY81EP QY81P ERNT-AQTY81 D-Sub connector (37P)
A68AD*
Analog input A68AD-S2*
Q68ADV ERNT-AQT68AD
module Q68ADI
A68ADN* ERNT-AQT68ADN Terminal block
A62DA, A62DA-S1 Q62DAN ERNT-AQT62DA (18 points)
Analog output A68DAV Q68DAVN
module ERNT-AQT68DA
A68DAI, A68DAI-S1 Q68DAIN
QD62
High-speed counter AD61 FCN connector
QD62-H01 ERNT-AQTD61
module (40P)
AD61-S1 QD62-H02
* Voltage input or current input is applicable to replacement Q Series modules.
If the existing A (Large Type) Series module uses a combination of voltage and current input, it cannot be replaced using a Q Series
large type base unit and a conversion adapter.
Consider using a conversion adapter (2-slot type) to replace the module with a Q64AD-GH (2 units required). (Refer to Section 2.4 for details)

33
2.2 Upgrade to Q Series using Q Series large type base unit and I/O modules

Tip
• Existing A (Large Type) Series wiring harness plugs in without modification.
• The Q Series large type base modules are compatible with High Performance Model QCPUs, Universal
model QCPU (except Q00UJCPU), and Remote I/O Stations.
Basic Model QCPUs, Process CPUs, Redundant CPUs, and Safety CPU are not compatible.
• Neither Q Series large type main base unit nor Q Series large type extension base unit can be used in a
multiple CPU system.
• The standard Q Series modules can be mounted on the Q Series large type base unit using the Q Series
large type blank cover.
• The Q Series large type base units can be used together with the standard Q Series base units.
(e.g., main base unit: Q312B, extension base unit: Q68BL)
• Some modules, such as modules that occupy two slots, cannot be mounted. Refer to “Q Series Large Type
Base Unit/I/O Module/Blank Cover User’s Manual” for details.
• After replacing the existing connector with the wiring intact, the 64-point connector type I/O module can be
used for the Q Series I/O module.
A blank cover is required to mount the Q Series large type base unit.
Note that the connector layout changes from top/bottom to left/right, so the position of the lower connector
moves to the upper side.
Check that the existing wiring is long enough.
• The 8-slot no power supply required type is not available for the Q Series extension base unit.
When replacing the existing extension base unit to the 8-slot no power supply required type A58B, replace
with the power mounted type Q68BL.
In this case, the mounting width dimensions will increase by 55 mm (411 mm to 466 mm).
Confirm the mounting space, and that the wiring is long enough to move to the mounting position.
• 2-slot type conversion adapters of the upgrade tool manufactured by Mitsubishi Electric Engineering Co., Ltd.
cannot be used.
• For details on the upgrade tool manufactured by Mitsubishi Electric Engineering Co., Ltd., please contact
your local Mitsubishi sales office or representative.

34
MEMO

35
2.2 Upgrade to Q Series using Q Series large type base unit and I/O modules

2.2.2 Upgrade to Q Series modules using Q Series large type base unit

Solution and Benefit


• Unlike the QA6�B extension base unit, which is used to directly mount existing A (Large Type)
Series I/O modules for a gradual upgrade, the Q Series large type base unit, I/O module, and
conversion adapter (upgrade tool) (manufactured by Mitsubishi Electric Engineering Co., Ltd.)
enables all modules to be upgraded to the Q Series at once and allows use of existing A Series
wiring.
• Having the same slot width as A (Large Type) Series base units, the Q Series large type base
units permit direct mount of existing 32-point I/O wiring on the Q Series I/O modules. This can
shorten the upgrade time.
• Performance specifications of the Q Series large type I/O modules are equivalent to those of the A
(Large Type) Series, eliminating concerns about compatibility with the connected external
devices.

The following is an example of upgrading an A (Large Type) Series system to the Q Series using the Q Series
large type base units, I/O modules, and conversion adapters.
● Instructions
(1) Replace the existing 32-point terminal block type I/O modules with Q Series large base units and I/O
modules, and use the same terminal blocks to connect with external wiring.
(2) If there is no compatible Q Series large type I/O module, use the conversion adapter (manufactured by
Mitsubishi Electric Engineering Co., Ltd.) to replace the existing module with standard Q Series I/O module.
A. System configuration example

Current configuration New configuration after replacement


Q01UCPU

Existing terminal block QX11L

Existing terminal block QX11L

Existing terminal block QX11L

Existing terminal block QX11L

Existing terminal block QX11L


Q61P
A2NCPU
A61P

AX11

AX11

AX11

AX11

AX11

Q35BL
A35B
Replace
QC06B
AC06B

QX41 QY41P
QY13L

QY13L

QY23L
Existing terminal block ERNT-AQTX41

Existing terminal block ERNT-AQTY41


*

*
Q61P
AX41
A61P

AY41

AY13

AY13

AY23

Existing terminal block

Existing terminal block

Existing terminal block

Q65BL
A65B
* Conversion adapters (upgrade tool)
manufactured by Mitsubishi Electric
Engineering Co., Ltd. are used.

36
2.2 Upgrade to Q Series using Q Series large type base unit and I/O modules

B. Module selection example


Product name Existing model Replacemant model
Main base unit A35B 1 Q35BL 1
Extension base unit A65B 1 Q65BL 1
Power supply module A61P 2 Q61P 2
Extension cable AC06B 1 QC06B 1
CPU module A2NCPU 1 Q01UCPU 1
AX11 5 QX11L 5
QX41 1
Input module
AX41 1 ERNT-AQTX41
1
(conversion adapter)
AY13 2 QY13L 2
AY23 1 QY23L 1
Output module QY41P 1
AY41 1 ERNT-AQTY41
1
(conversion adapter)
Q Series large type blank cover N/A - QG69L 2

Tip
• The Q Series power supply and CPU modules can be mounted without a Q Series large type blank cover.
• Always mount a Q Series large blank cover when mixing the Q Series modules. The Q Series I/O module is
used when using the Mitsubishi Electric Engineering Co., Ltd. upgrade tool, so the Q Series large blank cover
will be required.
• When the Q Series large type base unit is used, the depth is greater than that of the A Series.

A Series 32-point Q Series I/O module


I/O module Q Series large type I/O module

Conversion adapter
(upgrade tool)
manufactured by
Mitsubishi Electric
Engineering Co., Ltd.

115 25 129 25

140 154 165.3*

Unit: mm
* The depth of ERNT-AQT68DA is 176.2 mm.

37
2.2 Upgrade to Q Series using Q Series large type base unit and I/O modules

2.2.3 Upgrade to MELSECNET/H (remote I/O network) system using Q Series large type base unit
Solution and Benefit
• With the Q Series large type base units and I/O modules, an existing MELSECNET remote I/O network
system can be upgraded to a MELSECNET/H (remote I/O network) system by utilizing existing wiring.
Just remount the existing wired terminal block on the Q Series large type base units, I/O
modules. The upgrade time can be greatly reduced.
• In addition to the Q Series large type base units, I/O modules, the conversion adapter (upgrade
tool) (manufactured by MITSUBISHI Electric Engineering Co., Ltd.) can also be used to further
minimize upgrade process.
* For the model names of conversion adapters used as upgrade tools, refer to "Conversion adapter (upgrade tool) options
[manufactured by Mitsubishi Electric Engineering Co., Ltd.]" in page 33.

The following is an example of upgrading a MELSECNET network system consisting of only remote I/O stations
to a MELSECNET/H (remote I/O network) system using the Q Series large type base units, I/O modules, and
conversion adapters.
● Instructions
Use Q Series large type base units, I/O modules, and conversion adapters (manufactured by Mitsubishi
Electric Engineering Co., Ltd.) to replace the existing MELSECNET remote I/O network system.
A. System configuration example
QG69L
Current configuration New configuration after replacement Q Series large type
blank cover
Master station Remote master station
Q02UCPU

QJ71LP21-25
A2ACPUP21

QX11L

QX11L

QY13L

QY23L
Q61P
Empty
A61P

AX11

AX11

AY13

AY23

terminal block

terminal block

terminal block

terminal block
A35B
Existing

Existing

Existing

MELSECNET (optical loop) Existing

Remote I/O station 1 Q35BL

MELSECNET/H (remote I/O network) (optical loop)


AJ72P25
A61P

AX41
AX11

AY13

AY23

AY41

Remote I/O station 1


* *
QX41 QY41P
QJ72LP25-25

Replace
terminal block ERNT-AQTX41

terminal block ERNT-AQTY41


Q61P

QX11L

QY13L

QY23L

A35B
terminal block

terminal block

terminal block

Remote I/O station 2


Existing

Existing

Existing

Existing

Existing
AJ72P25
A61P

AX40
AX11

AY13

AY10

AY40

Q35BL

Remote I/O station 2


* * *
QX40 QY10 QY40P
QJ72LP25-25

A35B
terminal block ERNT-AQTX40

terminal block ERNT-AQTY10

terminal block ERNT-AQTY40


Q61P

QX11L

QY13L
terminal block

terminal block
Existing

Existing

Existing

Existing

Existing

Q35BL

* Q Series large type blank cover (QG69L) is required when using a Q Series module.

38
2.2 Upgrade to Q Series using Q Series large type base unit and I/O modules

B. Module selection example


(1) Master station to remote master station
Product name Existing model Replacemant model
Main base unit A35B 1 Q35BL 1
Power supply module A61P 1 Q61P 1
CPU module A2ACPUP21 1 Q02UCPU 1
Network module N/A - QJ71LP21-25 1
Q Series large type blank cover N/A - QG69L 1
Input module AX11 2 QX11L 2
AY13 1 QY13L 1
Output module
AY23 1 QY23L 1

(2) Remote I/O station 1


Product name Existing model Replacemant model
Main base unit A35B 1 Q35BL 1
Power supply module A61P 1 Q61P 1
Network module AJ72P25 1 QJ72LP25-25 1
Input module AX11 1 QX11L 1
AY13 1 QY13L 1
Output module
AY23 1 QY23L 1
QX41 1
Input module AX41 1
ERNT-AQTX41 (conversion adapter) 1
QY41P 1
Output module AY41 1
ERNT-AQTY41 (conversion adapter) 1
Q Series large type blank cover N/A - QG69L 2

(3) Remote I/O station 2


Product name Existing model Replacemant model
Main base unit A35B 1 Q35BL 1
Power supply module A61P 1 Q61P 1
Network module AJ72P25 1 QJ72LP25-25 1
AX11 1 QX11L 1
Input module QX40 1
AX40 1
ERNT-AQTX40 (conversion adapter) 1
AY13 1 QY13L 1
QY10 1
AY10 1
Output module ERNT-AQTY10 (conversion adapter) 1
QY40P 1
AY40 1
ERNT-AQTY40 (conversion adapter) 1
Q Series large type blank cover N/A - QG69L 3

Tip
• When utilizing existing optical fiber cables, note that the minimum distance between stations may be limited
to 200m depending on the type of cables used. Refer to “Q Corresponding MELSECNET/H Network System
Reference (remote I/O network)” for details.
If the distance between stations is less than 200m, the existing optical fiber cables can be utilized without
restrictions.
• When replacing the existing ACPU to a CPU with link function, an empty slot is required to mount the network module.
If no empty slot is available, the extension base unit must be added or the base unit must be changed to one
with more slots.

39
2.3 Replacing with AnS size Q Series large module

2.3 Replacing with AnS size Q Series large module

Solution and Benefit


• The mounting dimensions of the AnS size Q Series large base unit are the same as the A/QnA
(Small Type) Series, so there is no need to additionally drill mounting holes.
• Both the Q Series with upgrade tool (manufactured by Mitsubishi Electric Engineering Co., Ltd.)
and a module without upgrade tool can be mounted on the AnS size Q Series large base unit. The
terminal block used with the A/QnA (Small Type) Series can be used on the Q Series module with
upgrade tool (manufactured by Mitsubishi Electric Engineering Co., Ltd.) without changing the
wire size.

AnS size Q Series large base unit

Q Series module

Q Series module
AnS size Q Series
AnS size Q Series large
large blank cover*1
blank cover (QG69LS)

Upgrade tool *1: One required for each module mounted


on the AnS size large base unit.
Mount directly

● List of AnS size Q Series large base units


Product name Existing AnS/QnAS module Panel mounting type DIN rail mounting type*2
A1S35B Q35BLS Q35BLS-D
Main base unit
A1S38B Q38BLS Q38BLS-D
A1S65B Q65BLS Q65BLS-D
Extension base unit A1S68B Q68BLS Q68BLS-D
A1S55B Q55BLS Q55BLS-D

AnS size Q Series large


N/A QG69LS *3
blank cover
*2: The DIN rail mounting adaptor compatible with the base unit is enclosed.
*3: One required for each module mounted on the AnS size large base unit.

40
2.4 Replacement utilizing A (Large Type) upgrade tool (manufactured by Mitsubishi Electric Engineering Co., Ltd.)

2.4 Replacement utilizing A (Large Type) upgrade tool (manufactured by Mitsubishi


Electric Engineering Co., Ltd.)
2.4.1 Utilize A (Large Type) unit replacement upgrade tool

Solution and Benefit


• When replacing the existing A (Large Type) Series modules, there may be cases in which two
replacement modules are needed depending on the specification of the Q Series modules.
In such cases, the terminal blocks of the A (Large Type) Series modules do not need to be replaced
and can be used through the upgrade tool (base adapter and conversion adapter (2-slot type))
manufactured by Mitsubishi Electric Engineering Co., Ltd. Thus, wiring time is greatly reduced.
• The base adapter (upgrade tool) manufactured by Mitsubishi Electric Engineering Co., Ltd. is
compatible with the 12-slot main/extension base unit, enabling the expansion of slot numbers if
needed.

Upgrade tool manufactured by Mitsubishi Electric Engineering Co., Ltd.


The upgrade tool manufactured by Mitsubishi Electric Engineering Co., Ltd. consists of: base adapter,
conversion adapter, and conversion adapter fixing mount.
For details on the upgrade tool manufactured by Mitsubishi Electric Engineering Co., Ltd., refer to Section “2.2
Upgrade to Q Series using Q Series large type base unit and I/O modules”.
• Base adapter
An adapter to mount a Q Series base unit using installation holes of the existing A (Large Type) Series large
type base unit.
• Conversion adapter
An adapter to mount an existing A (Large Type) Series module terminal block on the replacement Q Series I/O
modules, analog modules, or high speed counter modules. (The existing terminal blocks and wires are utilized.)
There are two types of conversion adapters: 1-slot type and 2-slot type.
• Conversion adapter fixing mount
A mount to fix the conversion adapters.

Q Series main base unit / extension base unit

Base adapter

Q Series I/O module

Conversion adapter fixing mount

Conversion adapter (2-slot type)

Terminal block removed from the existing A (Large Type) Series I/O module

Conversion adapter (1-slot type)

41
2.4 Replacement utilizing A (Large Type) upgrade tool (manufactured by Mitsubishi Electric Engineering Co., Ltd.)

A. Conversion adapter
(1) 1-slot type (Mountable to Q Series large type base unit)
Separate adapter are available for the I/O module, analog module and high-speed counter module.
The 1-slot type conversion adapter can also be mounted on the Q Series large base unit.
Refer to Section “2.2 Upgrade to Q Series using Q Series large type base unit and I/O modules”.
(2) 2-slot type (Not mountable to Q Series large type base unit)
(a) For I/O module
Conversion adapter (2-slot type)
Input/Output MELSEC-A Series MELSEC-Q Series Shape
module model module model Model
MELSEC-A Series MELSEC-Q Series
AX11*1
Input QX10 x 2 modules ERNT-AQTX11
AX11EU*1
AY10A*2
AY11A*2 QY18A x 2 modules ERNT-AQTY10A
AY11AEU*2
AY13*3 Terminal block
Terminal block
AY13E*3 QY10 x 2 modules ERNT-AQTY13 (18-points)
(38-points)
Output AY13EU*3 x 2 modules
AY23*4 QY22 x 2 modules ERNT-AQTY23
AY51*5
QY50 x 2 modules
AY51-S1*5
ERNT-AQTY51
AY81*6
QY80 x 2 modules
AY81EP*6

*1: Replaceable with Q Series large type input module QX11L.


*2: Replaceable with Q Series large type output module QY11AL.
*3: Replaceable with Q Series large type output module QY13L.
*4: Replaceable with Q Series large type output module QY23L.
*5: Replaceable with Q Series large type output module QY51PL.
*6: Replaceable with one slot when Q Series output module QY81P is selected and conversion adapter ERNT-AQTY81 is used.
(Q Series large type base unit mountable)

(b) For analog module


Conversion adapter (2-slot type)
Input/Output MELSEC-A Series MELSEC-Q Series Shape
module model module model Model
MELSEC-A Series MELSEC-Q Series
A68AD
(Voltage/Current mixed input)
A68AD-S2
Q64AD-GH x 2 modules* ERNT-AQT68AD-GH
(Voltage/Current mixed input)
Input A68ADN
Terminal block
(Voltage/Current mixed input) Terminal block (18-points)
A616AD (38-points) x 2 modules
(Voltage input) Q68ADV x 2 modules
ERNT-AQT616AD
A616AD
(Current input) Q68ADI x 2 modules
A616DAV Q68DAVN x 2 modules
Output ERNT-AQT616DA
A616DAI Q68DAIN x 2 modules
* Replacement when using mixed voltage/current input for existing A (Large Type) Series module.
The 1-slot type conversion adapter can be used when using voltage input only or current input only.

42
2.4 Replacement utilizing A (Large Type) upgrade tool (manufactured by Mitsubishi Electric Engineering Co., Ltd.)

B. Base adapter
An adapter is used to mount a Q Series base unit using installation holes of the existing A (Large Type) Series
large type base unit.
MELSEC-A Series MELSEC-Q Series Mountable conversion adapter fixing mount
module model module model Base adapter model
ERNT-AQF12 ERNT-AQF8 ERNT-AQF5 ERNT-AQF3
Q312B, Q312DB ERNT-AQB38 ○ ○
A38B, A38HB
Q38B, Q38DB ERNT-AQB38 ○
Q612B ERNT-AQB68 ○ ○
A68B
Q68B ERNT-AQB68 ○
A58B Q68B ERNT-AQB58 ○
Q38B, Q38DB ERNT-AQB35 ○ ○
A35B
Q35B ERNT-AQB35 ○
Q68B ERNT-AQB65 ○ ○
A65B
Q65B, Q55B ERNT-AQB65 ○
A55B Q65B, Q55B ERNT-AQB55 ○
A32B Q33B ERNT-AQB32 ○
A62B Q63B, Q52B ERNT-AQB62 ○
A52B Q52B ERNT-AQB52 ○

C. Conversion adapter fixing mount


A mount to fix the conversion adapters.
Conversion adapter fixing mount model Description Remarks
ERNT-AQF12 12-slot conversion adapter fixing mount
ERNT-AQF8 8-slot conversion adapter fixing mount A conversion adapter fixing mount is
ERNT-AQF5 5-slot conversion adapter fixing mount required to mount conversion adapters.
ERNT-AQF3 3-slot conversion adapter fixing mount

Tip
• Tips for using the upgrade tool manufactured by Mitsubishi Electric Engineering Co., Ltd.
(a) The programmable controller side modules are Q Series modules.
The specifications and functions may be different from those of the A (Large Type) Series modules.
Refer to the specification comparison in the corresponding module's transition handbook to confirm
compliance with the specifications and functions of the external device.
(b) Q Series main/extension base unit can be used with Q Series large type base unit. Select a base unit
according to the module configuration after replacement.
(Example of base unit combination)
• Main base unit: Q312B (Q Series standard type)
(Upgrade tool manufactured by Mitsubishi Electric Engineering Co., Ltd. is used.)
• Extension base unit: Q68BL (Q Series large type base unit)
Note that only the following CPU types can be used with Q Series large type base unit.
High Performance Model QCPU
Universal Model QCPU (except for Q00JCPU)
MELSECNET/H remote I/O station
(There are no restrictions on the CPU type if only the upgrade tool manufactured by Mitsubishi
Electric Engineering Co., Ltd. is used.)
• The 1-slot type conversion adapter may be difficult to mount depending on the existing wire size. In such
cases, consider using a Q Series large base unit.

43
2.4 Replacement utilizing A (Large Type) upgrade tool (manufactured by Mitsubishi Electric Engineering Co., Ltd.)

2.4.2 Compatibility of Q Series large type base unit with the upgrade tool
The following table shows the compatibility of Q Series large type base unit with the upgrade tool manufactured by
Mitsubishi Electric Engineering Co., Ltd. when replacing existing A (Large Type) Series modules with Q Series modules.
Base adapter, Conversion adapter
Item Q Series large type base unit*1
(Upgrade tool)*2
Same width as the A (Large Type) Same width as Q Series base unit
Slot width of base unit*3 Series base unit (37.5 mm) (27.4 mm)
Power supply module Q Series standard power supply module ○ ○
Basic model QCPU × ○
High Performance model QCPU ○ ○
CPU module
Mountable Process CPU × ○
module Universal model QCPU ○*4 ○
Q Series large type I/O modules*5 ○ ×
• I/O module
• Intelligent function Q Series 1-slot module ○*7 ○
module Q Series 2-slot occupying module × ○
For terminal block type 16-point I/O module (1-slot type) ○*7 ○
For terminal block type 32-point I/O module (1-slot type) ○*7 △*9
Conversion For terminal block type 32-point I/O module (2-slot type) × △*10
adapter*6 For high-speed counter module ○*7 △*9
For analog module (1-slot type) ○ *7
△*9
For analog module (2-slot type) × △*10
Connection of QA/QA1S extension base unit* 8
○ ○

○: Applicable (Mountable) △: Applicable with restrictions (Mountable) ×: Not Applicable (Not mountable)
*1: Q Series large type base units can be used with Q Series base units (standard products).
*2: Mount a Q Series base unit (standard product) on the base adapter manufactured by Mitsubishi Electric
Engineering Co., Ltd.
MELSEC-A Series module MELSEC-Q Series module
*3: Check mounting conditions before using the upgrade
tool, because wiring space is reduced due to
a decrease in the module's width.
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7 0
8 1
9 2
A 3
4
B 5
C 6
D 7
E 8
F 9
A
B
C
D
E
F

*4: Q00UJCPU is not compatible.


*5: Number of common points and electrical specifications,etc.,
are same as that of A (Large Type) Series I/O module.
*6: Since the adapters are mounted on Q Series modules, 37.5 27.4
the specifications and functions are same as those of the
Q Series modules. (Please check the transition
handbook, since the specifications and functions are different from those of A (Large Type) Series module)
*7: The Q Series large type blank cover (QG69L) is required.
*8: Only High Performance Model QCPUs can be connected to the QA/QA1S extension base unit.
*9: If the size of the copper wire connected to the terminal block is 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

larger than 1.25 mm , ERNT-AQTX41, AQTY41, AQTX81,


2
0 0 0 0 0

AQTY81, AQT68AD, AQT68ADN, AQT68DA, and AQTD61


1 1 1 1 1
2 2 2 2 2
3 3 3 3 3
4 4 4 4 4
5 5 5 5 5
6 6 6 6 6
7 7 7 7 7
8 8 8 8 8

modules may be difficult to mount.


9 9 9 9 9
A A A A A
B B B B B
C C C C C
D D D D D
E E E E E
F F F F F

In this case, secure wiring space by leaving empty slots in


between modules. For example, mount modules on slot No. 0, 2,
4, 6, 8, and leave slot No. 1, 3, 5, 7 empty.
Mount a blank cover QG60 on the empty slots.
If there are not enough slots, consider using the Q Series
large type base unit.
*10: Applies when using replacing the existing A (Large Type) QY50
module with the two Q Series modules, and using the existing
wiring terminal block with the conversion adapter.
(Example) AY51 -> QY50 x 2 modules,
A616AD -> Q68ADV(I) x 2 modules

Conversion
adapter
Existing AY51 terminal block
44
2.4 Replacement utilizing A (Large Type) upgrade tool (manufactured by Mitsubishi Electric Engineering Co., Ltd.)

2.4.3 Select the DC input module replacement module

Tips for selecting replacement module


A. Rated input voltage
When selecting the replacement for the DC input module, many of the existing A (Large Type) and A
(Small Type) modules have a rated input voltage of 5, 12 or 24 V DC.
The replacement Q Series module is 12 V (some units are 5 or 12 V DC) or 24 V DC so the selected
module may differ depending on the existing module working state.
Always confirm the working state of the existing module when selecting the replacement.
(*Excerpt from L(N)08043: Replacement Handbook)

B. Common terminal arrangement


A positive common type and negative common type DC input module are available. The existing A (Large
Type) and A (Small Type) have positive common/negative common shared types.
When selecting a replacement for the positive common/negative common shared type, a positive common type
or negative common type must be selected since a shared type is not available with the Q Series modules.
Always confirm the working state of the existing module when selecting the replacement.
Refer to the following handbooks for detailed specifications on each module.
• Transition from MELSEC-AnS/QnAS (Large Type) Series to Q Series Handbook (Fundamentals):
L(NA)08043
• Transition from MELSEC-AnS/QnAS (Small Type) Series to Q Series Handbook (Fundamentals):
L(NA)08219
Also check the I/O Module User’s Guide for the relevant module.
(*Excerpt from IB-66140: I/O Module Type Building Block User's Manual and
IB-66541: AnS Module Type I/O User's Manual)
Internal circuit External switch Internal circuit
External switch 1 Photo coupler LED
1 Photo coupler R TB1
R LED LED
Internal
R
R circuit
Internal circuit

8 Internal
8
− + 9 circuit
+ − 9 TB17
DC12/24V DC12/24V LED
10
10 Photo coupler
R
R − + TB9. 18

+ −
17 17
18 DC12/24V
− + + − 18
DC12/24V DC12/24V

C. Using existing wiring


(1)Terminal block type module
When replacing the terminal block type module, the existing A (Large Type) or A (Small Type) module’s
terminal block can be used in the wired state by using the conversion adapter. This eliminates the need to
change the wiring.
(2)Connector type module
If the connector type on the connector type module is the same (i.e., 40-pin connector to 40-pin connector,
etc.), the wiring can be used.
If the connector type differs (i.e., D-sub 37-pin connector to 40-pin connector, etc.), the wiring must be
changed.

45
2.4 Replacement utilizing A (Large Type) upgrade tool (manufactured by Mitsubishi Electric Engineering Co., Ltd.)

A. Example of selecting A (Large Type) module replacement


Existing module Replacement module
Working conditions Remarks
Module model Module model Conversion
Working voltage Common terminal
arrangement adapter

AX40 24 V Positive QX40


ERNT-AQTX40
AX40-UL(Positive common) 12 V Positive QX70
•Terminal block → 40-pin connector
AX41 QX41 •Rated current: Approx. 4 mA
(Positive common) 24 V Positive
AX41-UL ERNT-AQTX41 •Terminal block → 40-pin connector
(Positive common) QX41-S2 •Rated current: Approx. 6 mA
12 V Shared QX71 •Terminal block → 40-pin connector
•Terminal block → 40-pin connector
QX41-S1 •Rated current: Approx. 4 mA
AX41-S1 24 V Positive
(Positive common) ERNT-AQTX41 •Terminal block → 40-pin connector
QX41-S2 •Rated current: Approx. 6 mA

12 V Shared QX71 •Terminal block → 40-pin connector


QX42
24 V Positive N/A
AX42(Positive common) QX41-S2(two modules needed) •Rated current: Approx. 6 mA
12 V Positive QX72
AX42-S1(Positive common) 24 V Positive QX42-S1 N/A
AX50(Positive common) Positive
AX50-S1 48 V QX50 ERNT-AQTX40
Shared
(Positive/negative common)
AX60 (Positive common)
100 V — •Example of replacing to
AX60-S1 (No replacement module) QX40+FA-TH16X100D31L
(Positive/negative common)
Positive QX40-S1 ERNT-AQTX40
AX70 24 V
Negative QX80 ERNT-AQTX80
(Positive/negative common shared)
5/12 V Shared QX70 ERNT-AQTX40
Positive QX41-S1 ERNT-AQTX41
AX71 24 V
Negative QX81-S2 ERNT-AQTX81 •Terminal block → D-sub 37-pin connector
(Positive/negative common shared)
5/12 V Shared QX71 ERNT-AQTX41
AX80(negative common) 24 V Negative QX80 ERNT-AQTX80
AX80E(negative common) 5/12 V Shared QX70 ERNT-AQTX40 •5 V DC is available only for AX80
•Rated current: Approx. 4 mA
QX81
•Terminal block → D-sub 37-pin connector
AX81 24 V Negative ERNT-AQTX81
(negative common) •Rated current: Approx. 6 mA
QX81-S2 •Terminal block → D-sub 37-pin connector
12 V Shared QX71 ERNT-AQTX41 •Terminal block → 40-pin connector
AX81B(Positive/negative common
24 V — (No replacement module) •Consider using QX81
shared with wire breakage detection)
Positive QX41-S1 ERNT-AQTX41 •Terminal block → 40-pin connector
•Rated current: Approx. 4 mA
QX81 •Terminal block → D-sub 37-pin connector
AX81-S1 24 V Negative ERNT-AQTX81
(Positive/negative common shared) •Rated current: Approx. 6 mA
QX81-S2 •Terminal block → D-sub 37-pin connector
12 V Shared QX71 ERNT-AQTX41 •Terminal block → 40-pin connector
48 V QX50(two modules needed) N/A
AX81-S2
Negative •Consider using QX81, and inserting a
(negative common) 60 V (No replacement module)
8.2 kΩ (1 W or larger) resistor in series
•Rated current: Approx. 4 mA
QX81 •Terminal block → D-sub 37-pin connector
AX81-S3 24 V Negative ERNT-AQTX81
(negative common) •Rated current: Approx. 6 mA
QX81-S2 •Terminal block → D-sub 37-pin connector
12 V Shared QX71 ERNT-AQTX41 •Terminal block → 40-pin connector
•Rated current: Approx. 4 mA
QX82
AX82 24 V Negative •D-sub 37-pin connector to 40-pin connector
N/A
(negative common) QX81-S2(two modules needed) •Rated current: Approx. 6 mA
12 V Shared QX72 •D-sub 37-pin connector to 40-pin connector

46
2.4 Replacement utilizing A (Large Type) upgrade tool (manufactured by Mitsubishi Electric Engineering Co., Ltd.)

B. Example of replacing A (Small Type) module


Existing module Replacement module
Working conditions Remarks
Module model Module model Conversion
Working voltage Common terminal
arrangement adapter
Positive QX40 ERNT-ASQTX40
24 V
Negative QX80 ERNT-ASQTX80
A1SX30
12 V Shared QX70 ERNT-ASQTX40
(Positive/negative common)
Consider rectifying and smoothing 24 V AC
12/24 V AC — (No replacement module) externally, and then input into QX40
24 V Positive QX40
A1SX40(Positive common) ERNT-ASQTX40
12 V Shared QX70
A1SX40-S1(Positive common) 24 V Positive QX40-S1 ERNT-ASQTX40
A1SX40-S2(Positive common) 24 V Positive QX40 ERNT-ASQTX40
QX41 •Rated current: Approx. 4 mA
24 V Positive
A1SX41(Positive common) QX41-S2 N/A •Rated current: Approx. 6 mA
12 V Positive QX71
A1SX41-S1(Positive common) 24 V Positive QX41-S1 N/A
QX41 •Rated current: Approx. 4 mA
A1SX41-S2(Positive common) 24 V Positive N/A
QX41-S2 •Rated current: Approx. 6 mA
QX42
24 V Positive
A1SX42(Positive common) QX41-S2(two modules needed) N/A •Rated current: Approx. 6 mA
12 V Positive QX72
A1SX42-S1(Positive common) 24 V Positive QX42-S1 N/A
QX42 N/A
A1SX42-S2 24 V Positive
QX41-S2(two modules needed) •Rated current: Approx. 6 mA
QX41-S1 •Rated current: Approx. 4 mA
Positive
A1SX71 24 V QX41-S2 •Rated current: Approx. 6 mA
(Positive/negative common shared) N/A
Negative QX81-S2 •40-pin connector to D-sub 37-pin connector
5/12 V Shared QX71
Positive QX40 ERNT-ASQTX40
A1SX80 24 V
(Positive/negative common shared) Negative QX80 ERNT-ASQTX80
12 V Shared QX70 ERNT-ASQTX40
A1SX80-S1/S2 Positive QX40 ERNT-ASQTX40
(Positive/negative common shared) 24 V
Negative QX80 ERNT-ASQTX80
Positive QX41-S2
A1SX81 24 V
Negative QX81-S2 N/A
(Positive/negative common shared)
12 V Shared QX71
A1SX81-S2 Positive QX41-S2 •D-sub 37-pin connector to 40-pin connector
24 V N/A
(Positive/negative common shared) Negative QX81-S2 •Rated current: Approx. 6 mA
A1SX82-S1 Positive QX42
24 V N/A
(Positive/negative common shared) Negative QX82-S1

47
2.5 Replacement utilizing A (Small Type) upgrade tool (manufactured by Mitsubishi Electric Engineering Co., Ltd.)

2.5 Replacement utilizing A (Small Type) upgrade tool (manufactured by Mitsubishi


Electric Engineering Co., Ltd.)
2.5.1 Utilize AnS/QnAS (Small Type) module replacement upgrade tool

Solution and Benefit


• The MELSEC-AnS Series/MELSEC-Q Series upgrade tool conversion adapter (manufactured by
Mitsubishi Electric Engineering Co., Ltd.) reduces wiring time as the AnS/QnAS (Small Type)
Series 16-point terminal block type module’s terminal block can be used without modification.
• New mounting holes do not need to be drilled as the MELSEC-AnS Series/MELSEC-Q Series
upgrade tool base adapter (manufactured by Mitsubishi Electric Engineering Co., Ltd.) can be
mounted with the existing main/extension base unit mounting holes.

MELSEC-AnS Series/MELSEC-Q Series upgrade tool


(manufactured by Mitsubishi Electric Engineering Co., Ltd.)
The MELSEC-AnS Series/MELSEC-Q Series upgrade tool (manufactured by Mitsubishi Electric Engineering
Co., Ltd.) is comprised of the base adapter and conversion adapter. This tool can be used with just the base
adapter or conversion adapter.
• Base adapter
This adapter is used to mount the Q Series base unit using the mounting holes for the existing AnS/QnAS
(Small Type) base unit.
• Conversion adapter
This adapter is used to mount the existing AnS/QnAS (Small Type) module’s terminal block onto the Q
Series I/O module or analog module after replacement.
(The terminal block and wiring are used in the original state.)

Existing AnS Series Q Series

Upgrade tool
(Base adapter)

Upgrade tool
(Conversion adapter)

Use existing wiring FA goods


for I/O module

When replacing the AnS Series I/O module with the


Q Series I/O module, the FA goods conversion module AC DC
and interface terminal module can also be used. AC lamp DC lamp

24 V DC

48
2.5 Replacement utilizing A (Small Type) upgrade tool (manufactured by Mitsubishi Electric Engineering Co., Ltd.)

A. List of conversion adapters


a. 1-slot type
MELSEC-AnS/QnAS Series MELSEC-Q Series
Module type Conversion adapter model*1*2
module model module model
A1SX10, A1SX10EU QX10 ERNT-ASQTXY10
A1SX40, A1SX40-S2 QX40
Input ERNT-ASQTX40
A1SX40-S1 QX40-S1
A1SX80, A1SX80-S1,
QX80 ERNT-ASQTX80
A1SX80-S2
A1SY10, A1SY10EU QY10 ERNT-ASQTXY10
A1SY22 QY22 ERNT-ASQTY22
Output A1SY40, A1SY40P QY40P ERNT-ASQTY40
A1SY50 QY50 ERNT-ASQTY50
A1SY80 QY80 ERNT-ASQTY80
A1S64AD Q64AD ERNT-ASQT64AD
Analog input Q68ADV
ERNT-ASQT68AD
A1S68AD Q68ADI
Q68AD-G ERNT-ASQT68AD-G*3
A1S62DA Q62DAN ERNT-ASQT62DA
Analog output A1S68DAV Q68DAVN
ERNT-ASQT68DA
A1S68DAI Q68DAIN
Analog input/output A1S63ADA Q64AD2DA ERNT-ASQT63ADA
Q68TD-G-H01 ERNT-ASQT68TD-H01*3
Thermocouple input A1S68TD
Q68TD-G-H02 ERNT-ASQT68TD-H02*3
Temperature -measuring A1S62RD3(N)
Q64RD ERNT-ASQT62RD
resistor input A1S62RD4(N)
QD62
A1SD61 QD62-H01 ERNT-ASQTD61*3
High-speed counter QD62-H02
module A1SD62 QD62
ERNT-ASQTD62*3
A1SD62E QD62E
A1S62D QD62D ERNT-ASQTD62D*3
*1: The module mounting slot position differs, so the wiring length must be adjusted.
*2: If the I/O modules are mounted adjacently using the conversion adapter, mounting may not be possible if the existing wires are thick or
there are many wires. If the wires interfere, lift the wires up toward the front so they are out of the way. If the wires still interfere, leave
one slot open to ensure space for the wires.
*3: Module with fixing frame. The base adapter ASQB3N, ASQB6N, or ASQB5N must be used.
Refer to the “Upgrade Tool General Catalog” issued by Mitsubishi Electric Engineering Co., Ltd. for details.

b. 2-slot type
MELSEC-AnS/QnAS Series MELSEC-Q Series
Module type Conversion adapter model*1
module model module model
A1SX20
Input QX28 x 2 modules ERNT-ASQTX20
A1SX20EU
A1SY60 ERNT-ASQTY60
Output QY68A x 2 modules
A1SY60E ERNT-ASQTY60E
*1: The XY address will change because two replacement modules are used. The program must be revised.
Consider using FA goods if not changing the XY address.

49
2.5 Replacement utilizing A (Small Type) upgrade tool (manufactured by Mitsubishi Electric Engineering Co., Ltd.)

B. Base adapter
MELSEC-AnS/QnAS Series MELSEC-Q Series
Module type Base adapter model*1
module model module model
Q33B ERNT-ASQB33N
A1S33B
Q33BQA1S51B ERNT-ASQB33-S1*2
Q35B ERNT-ASQB35N
Main base unit A1S35B
Q35BQA1S51B ERNT-ASQB35-S1*3
Q38B ERNT-ASQB38N
A1S38B
Q38BQA1S51B ERNT-ASQB38-S1*4
Extension base unit A1S65B Q65B ERNT-ASQB65N
(with power supply) A1S68B Q68B ERNT-ASQB68N
Extension base unit ERNT-ASQB55N
A1S55B Q55B
(without power supply)
A1SJCPU
CPU/base unit Q00JCPU
A1SJCPU-S3 ERNT-ASQB00JN
integrated type Q00UJCPU
A1SJHCPU
*1: The conversion adapter with fixing frame cannot be used with the base adapter that does not have “N” after the conventional model.
*2: The width is 36 mm larger, so mounting space must be secured. (No need to additionally drill mounting holes)
*3: The width is 22 mm larger, so mounting space must be secured. (No need to additionally drill mounting holes)
*4: Mountable within existing space (No need to additionally drill mounting holes)

Tip
• External wiring work is eliminated by directly mounting the existing AnS/QnAS (Small Type) I/O module
terminal block.
When using the conversion adapter, the terminal block cover (enclosed with conversion adapter) must be
replaced.
• When replacing the AnS/QnAS Series I/O module with connector type external connection method (wiring),
the existing wiring can be used. (The connector, with wires attached, can be connected to the Q Series
module.) Note that after replacement, the Q Series does not have a D-sub 37-pin connector type I/O
module, so the wiring must be changed to a 40-pin connector.
Note that units with and without the conversion adapter can be used together on the same base unit.
• If replacement is difficult from the existing AnS/QnAS (Small Type) I/O module, the module can be replaced
with the FA goods interface terminal module.
(Example: When A1SX20 is replaced, two QX28 modules will be required. This increases the number of
modules and changes the address. By selecting QX40 and providing the FA goods terminal module
“FA-TH16X200A31L” externally, the number of modules does not need to be increased, and the address will
not change.)
• When replacing a system containing an A Series large type extension base unit connected to the
AnS/QnASCPU to the Q Series, the “Q Series large type base unit, Mitsubishi Electric Engineering Co., Ltd.
Upgrade Tool” can be used to replace the A Series large type extension base unit and mounted modules.
Refer to the following section for tips on selecting the “Q Series large base unit, Mitsubishi Electric
Engineering Co., Ltd. Upgrade Tool” in this case.
Transition from MELSEC-A/QnA (Large Type) Series to Q Series Handbook (Fundamentals) L(NA)08043
MELSEC-A/QnA (Large), AnS/QnAS (Small) Transition Examples L08121 (-B and higher)
Note that the CPU/base unit integrated CPU type cannot be used with the Q Series large extension base
unit.
• For details on the upgrade tool manufactured by Mitsubishi Electric Engineering Co., Ltd., please contact
your local Mitsubishi sales office or representative.

50
2.5 Replacement utilizing A (Small Type) upgrade tool (manufactured by Mitsubishi Electric Engineering Co., Ltd.)

2.5.2 Compatibility of AnS size version Q Series large type base unit with the upgrade tool
The following table shows the compatibility of AnS size version Q Series large type base unit with the upgrade
tool manufactured by Mitsubishi Electric Engineering Co., Ltd. when replacing existing A (Small Type) Series
modules with Q Series modules.
AnS size version
Item Q Series large type base unit*1 Base adapter (Upgrade tool)*2

Same width as the A (Large Type) Same width as Q Series base unit
Slot width of base unit Series base unit (34.5 mm) (27.4 mm)
Power supply module Q Series standard power supply module ○ ○
Basic model QCPU × ○
High Performance model QCPU ○ ○
Process CPU × ○
Mountable CPU module
module*5 Universal model QCPU ○*3 ○
Multi-CPU configuration × ○
MELSECNET/H remote I/O module ○ ○
• I/O module Q Series 1-slot module*4 ○*6 ○
• Intelligent function
module Q Series 2-slot occupying module × ○
For terminal block type 16-point I/O module (1-slot type) ○*6 ○
Conversion For terminal block type 16-point I/O module (2-slot type) × ○*9
adapter*5 For high-speed counter module ○ *6
○*8
For analog module (1-slot type) ○ *6
○*8
Connection of QA/QA1S extension base unit* 7
○ ○
○: Applicable (Mountable) ×: Not Applicable (Not mountable)
*1: AnS size version Q Series large type base units, Q Series base units (standard products) and Q Series
large base units can be used together.
*2: Mount a Q Series base unit (standard product) on the base adapter manufactured by Mitsubishi Electric
Engineering Co., Ltd.
MELSEC-AnS Series module MELSEC-Q Series module

Replace with the


terminal block
cover enclosed
with the
conversion
*3: Q00UJCPU is not compatible. adapter.
*4: The following modules cannot be used.
• A module whose height is more than 98 mm.
• A module with a bracket on top. 34.5 27.4
• A module with a protrusion, such as a connector, on
the bottom.
• A module onto which Q7BAT-SET is mounted.
* Example
Q66AD-DG, Q66DA-G, Q68AD-G, Q68RD3-G, Q68TD-G-H02, Q64AD2DA, QD75M1, QD75MH1,
QD75M2, QD75MH2, QD75M4, QD75MH4, or QJ71WS96 with Q7BAT-SET mounted.
*5: Since the adapters are mounted on Q Series modules, the specifications and functions are same as those
of the Q Series modules. (Please check the transition handbook, since the specifications and functions
are different from those of A (Small type) Series module)
*6: The AnS size version Q Series large type blank cover (QG69LS) must be mounted.
*7: Only High Performance Model QCPUs can be connected to the QA/QA1S extension base unit.
This cannot be used with the MELSECNET/H remote I/O station, etc.
*8: If the size of the copper wire connected to the terminal block is larger than 1.25 mm2, it may be difficult to
mount the conversion adapter.
In this case, secure wiring space by leaving empty slots in between modules. For example, mount modules
on slot No. 0, 2, 4, 6, 8, and leave slot No. 1, 3, 5, 7 empty. If the number of slots is insufficient, consider
using the Q Series large type base unit. Mount a blank cover QG60 on the empty slots.
If there are not enough slots, consider using the AnS size version Q Series large type base unit.
*9: Applies when using replacing the existing A (Small Type) module with the two Q Series modules, and using
the existing wiring terminal block with the conversion adapter.
(Example) A1SX20 -> QX28 x 2 modules, A1SY60(E) -> QY68A x 2 modules

51
2.6 Replace A0J2(H) systems with Q Series using existing wiring
[Use A0J2 upgrade tool (manufactured by Mitsubishi Electric System & Service Co., Ltd.)]

2.6 Replace A0J2(H) systems with Q Series using existing wiring


[Use A0J2 upgrade tool (manufactured by Mitsubishi Electric System & Service Co., Ltd.)]

A0J2 upgrade tool

● A0J2 renewal tool features


The A0J2 renewal tool is used to replace existing A0J2(H) systems with the Q Series.
It consists of an interface module where the existing wired terminal block can be mounted and a base
adapter which enables utilization of the existing installation holes, etc.
A variety of installation methods are available to fit the installation space.

● Interface module features


The interface module has DC to relay output conversion and AC to DC input conversion functions. Hence,
replacement is possible using the interface module along with Q Series connector type DC I/O modules.
Dedicated cables are used to connect the interface module to Q Series I/O modules.

• Installation types
(1) Stackable type
• Existing mounting holes can be used.
• Suitable when there is enough depth.
(A depth of 195 mm (when one interface module
is stacked)/236 mm (when two interface modules
236 mm

are stacked) or more is required.)

(2) Flat mounting type


• Existing mounting holes can be used. However,
enough depth and space above the existing
modules are required.
(A space of 62 mm + 30 mm (for heat dissipation)
is required above existing modules)
(A depth of 158mm is required.)
158 mm

• The required depth is less than that of the


stackable type. 62
mm

(3) Standalone type


• Although space to install the main base unit
separately is needed, a base unit with a larger
number of I/O slots can be installed. Suitable
when there is not enough space in the existing
A0J2(H).
W = 189 mm (for Q33B: 3 I/O slots),
245 mm (for Q35B: 5 I/O slots),
W
328 mm (for Q38B: 8 I/O slots)

*A depth of A0J2 Series modules is 41 mm per module. (i.e., Total depth of two I/O modules and a CPU is 123 mm.)
A depth of the A0J2HCPUP21 data link module is 68 mm.

52
2.6 Replace A0J2(H) systems with Q Series using existing wiring
[Use A0J2 upgrade tool (manufactured by Mitsubishi Electric System & Service Co., Ltd.)]

A. Structure

Programmable controller

Mounting plate
(for fixing programmable controller)
· 3 slots (standard)
· 5 slots (option (Order separately))
Mounting frame (2-level, for stackable type)

Terminal block
(For 100/200 V AC, 24 V DC relay)
Interface module (for 24�/28��)

Interface module (for 56��)


Shape after assembly

Base adapter (for 56��) Large width base adapter

Indicates a part of the programmable controller fixing frame set. (For configuring SC-A0JQSEL-U2)

B. Basic configuration

Current configuration After replacement


A0J2(H) Series Q Series programmable controller A0J2 upgrade tool
programmable controller • Main base unit (Q33B) • Interface module*2
• CPU module • Power supply module • Programmable controller
• I/O module (Q62P)*1 fixing frame set*3
• CPU module • Programmable controller
• I/O module connection cable

*1: Prepare a separate external power supply when not selecting the Q62P.
Refer to “E. Interface module power supply” for the required external 24 V DC power supply capacity.
*2: The A0J2 upgrade tool is compatible with the interface modules as shown in the table on the next page.
Refer to the following material from Mitsubishi Electric System & Service Co., Ltd. for details on the
“programmable controller fixing frame set”, “base adapter” and “mounting plate”, etc., that are not
described in these examples.
• A0J2 Upgrade Tool Catalog (material No.: X900904-165)
*3: The programmable controller fixing frame set is configured of the “base adapter”, “mounting plate”,
“mounting frame”, “terminal block” and “power cable”.
*4: The dimensions for the stackable type apply when the programmable controller I/O module is a
connector type module, and the programmable controller connection cable SC-A0JQC**M is being used.
The dimensions will differ according to the module and wiring connector type being used.

53
2.6 Replace A0J2(H) systems with Q Series using existing wiring
[Use A0J2 upgrade tool (manufactured by Mitsubishi Electric System & Service Co., Ltd.)]

C. Compatible interface module list


• Available models
Model to be discontinued Alternative model
Model Alternative programmable controller I/O module
Product name (A0J2 I/O module / Interface module
compact type NET/MINI) Q Series AnS Series CC-Link
A0J2-E32A/
SC-A0JQIF-32A
Intput AJ35PTF-32A QX41/
A1SX41 AJ65SBTCF1-32D
module A0J2-E32D/ QX41Y41P
SC-A0JQIF-32D
AJ35PTF-32D
A0J2-E24R/
SC-A0JQIF-24R
AJ35PTF-24R
Output A0J2-E24S/ QY41P/
A1SY41P AJ65SBTCF1-32T SC-A0JQIF-24S
module AJ35PTF-24S QX41Y41P
A0J2-E24T/
SC-A0JQIF-24T
AJ35PTF-24T
A0J2-E28AR/ A1SH42 AJ65SBTCF1-32D
SC-A0JQIF-28AR
AJ35PTF-28AR A1SX41+A1SY41P +AJ65SBTCF1-32T
A0J2-E28AS/ A1SH42 AJ65SBTCF1-32D
SC-A0JQIF-28AS
AJ35PTF-28AS A1SX41+A1SY41P +AJ65SBTCF1-32T
A0J2-E28DR/ A1SH42 AJ65SBTCF1-32D
SC-A0JQIF-28DR
AJ35PTF-28DR A1SX41+A1SY41P +AJ65SBTCF1-32T
A0J2-E28DS/ A1SH42 AJ65SBTCF1-32D
SC-A0JQIF-28DS
AJ35PTF-28DS A1SX41+A1SY41P +AJ65SBTCF1-32T
A0J2-E28DT/ A1SH42 AJ65SBTCF1-32D
SC-A0JQIF-28DT
AJ35PTF-28DT A1SX41+A1SY41P +AJ65SBTCF1-32T
I/O module QX41Y41P
A0J2-E56AR/ A1SH42 AJ65SBTCF1-32D
SC-A0JQIF-56AR
AJ35PTF-56AR A1SX41+A1SY41P +AJ65SBTCF1-32T
A0J2-E56AS/ A1SH42 AJ65SBTCF1-32D
SC-A0JQIF-56AS
AJ35PTF-56AS A1SX41+A1SY41P +AJ65SBTCF1-32T
A0J2-E56DR/ A1SH42 AJ65SBTCF1-32D
SC-A0JQIF-56DR
AJ35PTF-56DR A1SX41+A1SY41P +AJ65SBTCF1-32T
A0J2-E56DS/ A1SH42 AJ65SBTCF1-32D
SC-A0JQIF-56DS
AJ35PTF-56DS A1SX41+A1SY41P +AJ65SBTCF1-32T
A0J2-E56DT/ A1SH42 AJ65SBTCF1-32D
SC-A0JQIF-56DT
AJ35PTF-56DT A1SX41+A1SY41P +AJ65SBTCF1-32T

54
2.6 Replace A0J2(H) systems with Q Series using existing wiring
[Use A0J2 upgrade tool (manufactured by Mitsubishi Electric System & Service Co., Ltd.)]

D. Programmable controller connection cable (connecting interface module and


programmable controller I/O module)

Model Specifications*
SC-A0JQC03M Cable length: 0.35 m (MIL connector - FCN connector)
SC-A0JQC10M Cable length: 1.0 m (MIL connector - FCN connector)
SC-A0JQC20M Cable length: 2.0 m (MIL connector - FCN connector)
SC-A0JQC30M Cable length: 3.0 m (MIL connector - FCN connector)
SC-A0JQC50M Cable length: 5.0 m (MIL connector - FCN connector)
* For cable length other than described above, please contact your local Mitsubishi sales office or
representative.

E. Interface module power supply


24 V DC must be supplied as the power source for the interface module.
The power can be supplied from the Q Series power supply module Q62P, but the capacity may be
insufficient depending on the module configuration.
Prepare an external 24 V DC supply if the Q62P 24 V DC capacity (0.6 A) is insufficient.

Model Interface module Module external power supply Relay drive power supply
SC-A0JQIF32D 200 mA ―
Input module
SC-A0JQIF32A 210 mA ―
SC-A0JQIF24R ― 230 mA
Output module SC-A0JQIF24S 370 mA ―
SC-A0JQIF24T 70 mA ―
SC-A0JQIF28AR 105 mA 125 mA
SC-A0JQIF28AS 290 mA ―
SC-A0JQIF28DR 100 mA 125 mA
SC-A0JQIF28DS 285 mA ―
I/O module SC-A0JQIF28DT 130 mA ―
SC-A0JQIF56AR 210 mA 230 mA
SC-A0JQIF56AS 580 mA ―
SC-A0JQIF56DR 200 mA 230 mA
SC-A0JQIF56DS 570 mA ―
SC-A0JQIF56DT 260 mA ―
* The above module external power supply sources include the programmable controller side I/O
module external wiring 24 V DC.
However, these do not include the CC-Link I/O module power supply when replacing to the CC-Link.

55
2.6 Replace A0J2(H) systems with Q Series using existing wiring
[Use A0J2 upgrade tool (manufactured by Mitsubishi Electric System & Service Co., Ltd.)]

2.6.1 Replace A0J2(H) systems with Q Series using A0J2 upgrade tool

Solution and Benefit


• Existing A0J2 I/O wiring can be mounted on the A0J2 upgrade tool without modification.
• The A0J2 upgrade tool takes in AC/DC input and sends these signals to a programmable
controller's input module. It also outputs the signals received from a programmable controller's
output module to the external devices. Therefore, any A0J2 Series I/O modules can be replaced
with QX41Y41P by selecting the appropriate A0J2 upgrade tool.
• QX41Y41P, the 64-point I/O combined module (32-point input for the first half and 32-point output
for the second half), can be used to replace the A0J2 Series I/O modules without changing the I/O
assignment.
• The installation size of the A0J2 upgrade tool is the same as that of the A0J2-E56� I/O modules,
eliminating the need of making new holes.

The following is an example of replacing an A0J2(H) system with Q Series using the A0J2 upgrade tool.

● Instructions
(1) Replace the A0J2H Series CPU with a Q Series CPU and the I/O modules with QX41Y41P.
The existing I/O address can be used for the QX41Y41P, and program modifications can be avoided.
(2) When the A0J2 renewal tool is used to mount the terminal blocks of the existing A0J2 I/O modules, the
existing external wiring does not need to be changed.
* The A0J2 renewal tool is not assigned an I/O module number.
The "No.=n" in the new configuration keeps track of the order of connection with the modules on the
programmable controller side to avoid changes in I/O addresses.
Check the I/O module number in the current configuration and connect the programmable controller side
modules accordingly.

A. System configuration example

Current configuration

A0JC01 A0JC01 A0JC03 A0JC03


A0J2E56DR

A0J2E56DR

A0J2E56DR
A0J2HCPU

A0J2E24R

No. 3 No. 0 No. 1 No. 2


YE0 to YF7 X00 to X1F X40 to X5F X80 to X9F
Y20 to Y37 Y60 to Y77 YA0 to YB7 * "n" of No.=n indicates the I/O module number.

56
2.6 Replace A0J2(H) systems with Q Series using existing wiring
[Use A0J2 upgrade tool (manufactured by Mitsubishi Electric System & Service Co., Ltd.)]

New configuration after replacement

(1) When the stackable type is used ··· With mounting plates for fixing frame set

QY41P
Q00UCPU

QX41

QX41

QX41
Y41P

Y41P

Y41P
Empty

Empty
Q61P
Q61P
X00... YE0... X40... X80...

SC-A0JQC03M (0.35 m I/O connection cable) x 5


Q33B QC06B Q63B SC-A0JQC10M (1.0 m I/O connection cable) x 2
SC-A0JQIF56DR

SC-A0JQIF56DR

SC-A0JQIF56DR
SC-A0JQIF24R

No. =3 No. =0 No. =1 No. =2

SC-A0JQSEL-U2 SC-A0JQSEL-U1 SC-A0JQBSL


(2-level stackable type) (1-level stackable type) (Standalone type)

(a) Module selection example (Q Series)


Product name Existing module Stackable type replacement module
Power supply module Q61P 2
CPU module Q00UCPU 1
A0J2HCPU 1
Main base unit Q33B 1
Extension base unit Q63B 1
I/O module A0J2-E56DR 3 QX41Y41P 3
Output module A0J2-E24R 1 QY41P 1
Extension cable A0JC01/A0JC03 4 QC06B (0.6 m) 1
(CPU built-in power supply 24 V DC power supply module
24 V DC power supply module - -
is used.) (Commercially available)

(b) A0J2 upgrade tool


Product name Stackable type replacement module Remarks
SC-A0JQIF56DR 3
Interface module
SC-A0JQIF24R 1
Programmable controller SC-A0JQSEL-U2 1
fixing frame set
(Base adapter + mounting frame) SC-A0JQSEL-U1 1
Mounting plate Change the adapter plate for
SC-A0JQPT3 1
(for Q63B) Q33B with the one for Q63B.
Base adapter
SC-A0JQBSL 1
(for standalone type)
Programmable controller SC-A0JQC03M 5 Cable length: 0.35 m
connection cable SC-A0JQC10M 2 Cable length: 1.0 m

57
2.6 Replace A0J2(H) systems with Q Series using existing wiring
[Use A0J2 upgrade tool (manufactured by Mitsubishi Electric System & Service Co., Ltd.)]

(2) When the stackable type is used ··· With a 5-slot base unit

QY41P
Q00UCPU

QX41

QX41

QX41
Y41P

Y41P

Y41P

Empty
Q61P
X00... X40... X80... YE0...

SC-A0JQC03M (0.35 m I/O connection cable) x 3


SC-A0JQC10M (1.0 m I/O connection cable) x 4
Q35B

SC-A0JQIF56DR
SC-A0JQIF56DR

SC-A0JQIF56DR
SC-A0JQIF24R

No. =3 No. =0 No. =1 No. =2

SC-A0JQSEL-U2 SC-A0JQBSL SC-A0JQBSL


(2-level stackable type) (Standalone type) (Standalone type)

Size description (2-level stackable type: 5-slot base unit is used)

(Q35B)

Q Series programmable controller


236
About

E24R
100

E56DR

29 190 29 Unit: mm

(a) Module selection example (Q Series)


Product name Existing module Stackable type replacement module
Power supply module Q61P 1
CPU module A0J2HCPU 1 Q00UCPU 1
Main base unit Q35B 1
A0J2-E56DR 3 QX41Y41P 3
I/O module
A0J2-E24R 1 QY41P 1
(CPU built-in power supply 24 V DC power supply module
24 V DC power supply module - -
is used.) (Commercially available)

(b) A0J2 upgrade tool


Product name Stackable type replacement module Remarks
SC-A0JQIF56DR 3
Interface module
SC-A0JQIF24R 1
Programmable controller
fixing frame set SC-A0JQSEL-U2 1
(Base adapter + mounting frame)
29 mm width increase on both sides as
Mounting plate
SC-A0JQPT5 1 compared to the plate for Q33B. (For replacing
(for Q35B)
the fixing frame set SC-A0JQPT3)
Base adapter For E56 (mounting plate)
SC-A0JQBSL 2
(for standalone type) * Required for standalone type
Programmable controller SC-A0JQC03M 3 Cable length: 0.35 m
connection cable SC-A0JQC10M 4 Cable length: 1.0 m

58
2.6 Replace A0J2(H) systems with Q Series using existing wiring
[Use A0J2 upgrade tool (manufactured by Mitsubishi Electric System & Service Co., Ltd.)]

(3) When the standalone type is used

QY41P
QX41

QX41

QX41
Q00UCPU

Y41P

Y41P

Y41P

Empty
Q61P
X00... X40... X80... YE0...

SC-A0JQC10M (1.0 m I/O connection cable) x 7


Q35B

SC-A0JQIF56DR
SC-A0JQIF56DR

SC-A0JQIF56DR
SC-A0JQIF24R

No. =3 No. =0 No. =1 No. =2

SC-A0JQBSL SC-A0JQBSL SC-A0JQBSL


(Standalone type) (Standalone type) (Standalone type)

(a) Module selection example (Q Series)


Product name Existing module Standalone type replacement module
Power supply module Q61P 1
CPU module Q00UCPU 1
A0J2HCPU 1
Main base unit Q35B 1
Extension base unit N/A -
I/O module A0J2-E56DR 3 QX41Y41P 3
Output module A0J2-E24R 1 QY41P 1
Extension cable A0JC01/A0JC03 4 N/A -
(CPU built-in power supply 24 V DC power supply module
24 V DC power supply module - -
is used.) (Commercially available)

(b) A0J2 upgrade tool


Product name Standalone type replacement module Remarks
SC-A0JQIF56DR 3
Interface module
SC-A0JQIF24R 1
Base adapter
SC-A0JQBSL 3
(for standalone type)
Programmable controller
SC-A0JQC10M 7 Cable length: 1.0 m
connection cable

Tip
• When using the stackable type, check that there is enough depth.
Also, check the width when using a programmable controller main/extension base unit with 5 slots because it
may have increased.
• Select the appropriate cable length between the interface module and the programmable controller (I/O
module) depending on the system configuration.
• The I/O addresses (X/Y addresses) of existing A0J2 I/O modules are preset according to the I/O module
numbers. Check the I/O module number that has been set for each existing module.
Connect the A0J2 renewal tool with the I/O modules in a way that the same I/O addresses are used when
upgrading to Q Series CPU.
• When an output-only module such as SC-A0JQIF24R is used, selecting QY41P as the programmable
controller side module changes the I/O addresses and requires program modification.
In this case, the start I/O address of the affected slots can be re-assigned in I/O assignment of Q Series CPU
parameter in order to avoid changes to the program.
• 24 V DC output power supply of the Q62P can be used as an external power supply for the A0J2 renewal
tool. However, depending on the number of modules used, an extra power supply may be needed. In this
case, prepare an external 24 V DC power supply.

59
2.6 Replace A0J2(H) systems with Q Series using existing wiring
[Use A0J2 upgrade tool (manufactured by Mitsubishi Electric System & Service Co., Ltd.)]

2.6.2 Upgrade to MELSECNET/H (remote I/O network) system using A0J2 upgrade tool

Solution and Benefit


• Using the A0J2 upgrade tool, A0J2R25(P25) remote I/O stations can be replaced with
MELSECNET/H remote I/O stations without modifying external wiring.
• By making the same network parameter settings as the current ones, program modifications can
be avoided.

The following is an example of upgrading a MELSECNET network system consisting of only remote I/O stations
to a MELSECNET/H (remote I/O network) system using the A0J2 upgrade tool.
● Instructions
(1) Replace the MELSECNET network system with MELSECNET/H remote I/O network system. The network
parameter settings remain the same, and it is not necessary to make changes to the program.
(2) Change the cable system from MELSECNET coaxial loop to MELSECNET/H coaxial bus. New wires are
not necessary because the existing coaxial loop cables can be used.

A. System configuration example


Current configuration

Master station
A0J2E56DR

A0J2E56DR
A0J2R25

A0J2R25
Power supply

A2NCPUR21

I/O module

I/O module

I/O module

I/O module

Empty

X80 to X9F XC0 to XDF


MELSECNET (Coaxial loop) YA0 to YB7 YE0 to YF7

Replace

New configuration after replacement (when the stackable type is used)


Q35B Q33B Q33B
I/O module

I/O module

I/O module

I/O module

QX41Y

QX41Y
QJ71BR11

QJ72BR15

QJ72BR15
41P

41P
Q01U
CPU

Empty

Empty
Empty

Empty
Q62P

Q62P

Q62P

MELSECNET/H (Coaxial bus) R R


Coaxial bus
SC-A0JQIF56DR

SC-A0JQIF56DR
Existing terminal block

Existing terminal block

Existing terminal block

Existing terminal block

SC-A0JQSEL-U1 SC-A0JQSEL-U1
(1-level stackable type) (1-level stackable type)

SC-A0JQC03M (0.35 m I/O connection cable) x 4

60
2.6 Replace A0J2(H) systems with Q Series using existing wiring
[Use A0J2 upgrade tool (manufactured by Mitsubishi Electric System & Service Co., Ltd.)]

B. Module selection example


(1) Programmable controller

Product name Existing module Replacemant module


Power supply module A62P 1 Q62P (with 24 V DC) 3
CPU module A2NCPUR21 1 Q01UCPU 1
Main base unit (master station) A35B 1 Q35B 1
Main base unit (remote I/O station) N/A - Q33B 2
MELSECNET/H master station module N/A - QJ71BR11 1
MELSECNET/H remote I/O station module A0J2R25 2 QJ72BR15 2
I/O module A0J2-E56DR 2 QX41Y41P 2
Terminating resistor for coaxial bus link (75 Ω) N/A - A6RCON-R75 2

(2) A0J2 upgrade tool

Product name Model Remarks


Interface module SC-A0JQIF56DR 2
Programmable controller fixing frame set SC-A0JQSEL-U1 2
Programmable controller connection cable SC-A0JQC03M 4 Cable length (0.35 m)

Tip
• The overall distance of coaxial bus is 500 m (when using 5C2V). Use the following product to extend the
distance up to 2.5 km.
"Repeater Unit for the MELSECNET/10 Coaxial Bus System type A6BR10"
• When upgrading an optical loop network system, use the “QJ71LP21-25 for the master station” and the
“QJ72LP25-25 for the remote I/O station” so that the optical loop can be maintained.
The distance between stations differs depending on the type of optical fiber cables used in the existing
system. Refer to “Q Corresponding MELSECNET/H Network System Reference (Remote I/O network)”
SH-080124 for details.

61
2.6 Replace A0J2(H) systems with Q Series using existing wiring
[Use A0J2 upgrade tool (manufactured by Mitsubishi Electric System & Service Co., Ltd.)]

2.6.3 Replace MELSECNET/MINI compact type remote I/O modules with CC-Link
Solution and Benefit
• By mounting existing terminal blocks on the A0J2 upgrade tool (interface module), the compact
type remote I/O modules can be replaced with CC-Link modules without modifying external
wiring.
• Existing compact type remote I/O modules and A0J2 upgrade tools have the same number of I/O
points, realizing the system upgrade without program modification.
* For details on the A0J2 upgrade tool, refer to "Section 2.6 Replace A0J2(H) systems with Q
Series using existing wiring".

The following is an example of replacing MELSECNET/MINI compact type remote I/O modules with CC-Link
using the A0J2 upgrade tool.
● Instructions
(1) Select connector type CC-Link I/O modules to allow connection with the A0J2 upgrade tools.
(2) Select a CC-Link I/O module for replacement with a connector type external wiring to enable use of the
A0J2 upgrade tool connection dedicated cable.

A. System configuration example


Current configuration
Terminal AJ71PT

Terminal block

Terminal block
Terminal block
I/O module

I/O module

I/O module

I/O module

32-S3
A2NCPU

AJ35PTF-56DR

AJ35PTF-56DR

AJ35PTF-56DR
A61P

Existing terminal block

Existing terminal block

Existing terminal block

Existing terminal block

Existing terminal block

Existing terminal block


block

A35B

Replace
New configuration after replacement

SC-A0JQPT2 SC-A0JQPT2 SC-A0JQPT2


I/O module

I/O module

QJ61BT
I/O module

I/O module
Q01U

11N
CPU
Q61P

AJ65SBTCF1-32D AJ65SBTCF1-32D AJ65SBTCF1-32D

AJ65SBTCF1-32T AJ65SBTCF1-32T AJ65SBTCF1-32T

The twisted pair


communication cables
must be replaced with
CC-Link dedicated
cables.
Existing terminal block

Existing terminal block

Existing terminal block

Existing terminal block

Existing terminal block

Existing terminal block

SC-A0J SC-A0J SC-A0J


QIF56DR QIF56DR QIF56DR

SC-A0JQSEL-U1 SC-A0JQSEL-U1 SC-A0JQSEL-U1


(1-level stackable type) (1-level stackable type) (1-level stackable type)

62
2.6 Replace A0J2(H) systems with Q Series using existing wiring
[Use A0J2 upgrade tool (manufactured by Mitsubishi Electric System & Service Co., Ltd.)]

B. Module selection example


(1) Programmable controller
Product name Existing module Replacemant module
Power supply module A61P 1 Q61P (without 24 V DC) 1
CPU module A2NCPU 1 Q01UCPU 1
Main base unit A35B 1 Q35B 1
CC-Link (master module) AJ71PT32-S3 1 QJ61BT11N 1
CC-Link input module AJ65SBTCF1-32D 3
AJ35PTF-56DR 3
CC-Link output module AJ65SBTCF1-32T 3
Note: Select appropriate I/O modules according to specifications of existing modules.

(2) A0J2 upgrade tool


Product name Model Remarks
Interface module SC-A0JQIF56DR 3
Programmable controller fixing frame set SC-A0JQSEL-U1 3 For 1-level stackable type
Mounting plate SC-A0JQPT2 3 For CC-Link I/O modules
Programmable controller connection cable SC-A0JQC03M 6 Cable length (0.35 m)

(CC-Link stackable type)

Tip
• MELSECNET/MINI twisted pair cables must be replaced with CC-Link dedicated cables.
• CC-Link I/O modules and A0J2 upgrade tools (interface modules) require 24 V DC power supply in addition
to power supply for control. Prepare a 24 V DC power supply separately.
• When using the stackable type renewal tool as shown in the example, make sure there is enough depth.
(Required depth: 120 mm or more)
The mounting plate for CC-Link I/O modules is sold separately.
• Up to two CC-Link I/O modules can be mounted on the 1-level stackable type upgrade tool. To replace
2-level compact type remote I/O modules, select the standalone type upgrade tool. If the 2-level stackable
type upgrade tool is selected, two CC-Link I/O modules cannot be mounted.

63
3.1 Utilize existing A (Large Type)/AnS, QnAS (Small Type) modules

3. Replacement utilizing existing modules


3.1 Utilize existing A (Large Type)/AnS, QnAS (Small Type) modules
3.1.1 Utilize A/QnA (Large Type) Series QA6�B extension base unit

Solution and Benefit


• The QA6�B extension base unit permits reuse of existing A (Large Type) Series modules,
minimizing wiring time.
• The system can be upgraded even if Q Series compatible modules do not exist.

The CPU can be replaced with the QCPU. An example of using a current A (Large Type) module without
modification to shorten the re-wiring man-hours is shown below.

● Instructions
(1) Only the CPU is replaced to the Q Series. The current I/O module is used.
Replace the existing A (Large Type) main base A38B to QA68B, and mount the existing module.
(2) If the module must be replaced with the Q Series, select the module and then mount on the Q Series main
base unit.
(3) Avoid changing the current I/O assignments.

A. System configuration example

Current configuration After replacement


Q06UDH
CPU

QJ71E71
QJ61BT

Empty

Empty
Q61P

BR11
QJ71

-100
11N
AJ71E71N3-T

Q35B
A68DAI-S1

AJ71BR11
AJ61BT11
A3NCPU

A68AD

A68AD
A61P

AX41

AY10

Replace Modules upgraded


from the A Series

A38B
A68DAI-S1
A68AD

A68AD
Empty

Empty

Empty
A61P

AX41

AY10

QC06B
QA68B

Existing A Series Empty slots for replacing


modules to Q Series module

64
3.1 Utilize existing A (Large Type)/AnS, QnAS (Small Type) modules

B. Module selection example


Product name Existing module Replacement module
Power supply module (for main base unit) N/A - Q61P 1
CPU module A3NCPU 1 Q06UDHCPU 1
Main base unit A38B 1 Q35B 1
CC-Link master module AJ61BT11 1 QJ61BT11N 1
MELSECNET/10 network module AJ71BR11 1 QJ71BR11 1
Ethernet module AJ71E71N3-T 1 QJ71E71-100 1
Extension base unit N/A - QA68B 1
Power supply module (for extension base unit) A61P 1 Utilize existing module -
Extension cable N/A - QC06B 1
Input module AX41 1 Utilize existing module -
Output module AY10 1 Utilize existing module -
Analog input module A68AD 2 Utilize existing module -
Analog output module A68DAI-S1 1 Utilize existing module -

Tip
• The following A (Large Type) Series modules need to be replaced with a Q Series CPU compatible model.
CC-Link master/local module
MELSECNET/10 network module
Ethernet module
Computer link module
etc.
• After replacing the module, use the parameter I/O assignment and set so that the existing module addresses
are not changed.
• The QA6�B extension base units and QA1S6�B extension base units are only compatible with High
Performance Model QCPU or Universal Model QCPU (first five digits of serial No. “13102” or higher).
Basic Model QCPUs, Process CPUs, Redundant CPUs, Safety CPUs, and Remote I/O Stations are not
compatible.
• For precautions and restrictions when using QA6�B extension base unit, refer to "QA65B/QA68B Extension
Base Unit User’s Manual".

65
3.1 Utilize existing A (Large Type)/AnS, QnAS (Small Type) modules

3.1.2 Utilize existing I/O modules and extension base unit with Q Series CPU
(Use QA conversion adapter)
Solution and Benefit
The QA conversion adapter module enables the existing extension base, including the mounted I/O
modules, to connect to a Q Series main base unit. This can shorten the installation and wiring
modification times.

The following is an example of reusing existing A (Large Type) Series modules with a Q Series CPU using the
QA conversion adapter module.

● Instructions
(1) Replace the A (Large Type) Series CPU with the Q Series CPU (Q02HCPU) and mount it on the Q Series
main base unit (Q3�B).
(2) To reutilize I/O modules mounted on the existing A (Large Type) Series main base unit, mount them on the
QA6�B extension base unit.
(3) Mount the “QA6ADP” adapter on the connector of each existing extension base unit to allow the use
of existing modules.
(4) Connect the base units with the Q Series extension cable (QC�B).

A. System configuration example


Current configuration After replacement
Replace the A (Large Type)
CPU with a QCPU
Q03UD
CPU
Q Series modules
Q61P
A3ACPU
A61P

AX42

AX42

AX42

AX42

AX42

are mountable
Q35B
QC06B
A35B X00... Extension base stage 1

Remount the
A61P

AX42

AX42

AX42

AX42

AX42
modules on the
QA6�B.

AC06B
QA65B X00...
QC06B
Extension base stage 1
Extension base stage 2

Utilize the modules


A61P

AX41

AX41

AY42

AY42

AY42

and extension base unit.


A61P

AX41

AX41

AY42

AY42

AY42

*
QA6 Extension stage
ADP number setting: 2nd stage
A65B X140...
A65B X140...
AC06B
QC06B
Extension base stage 2 Extension base stage 3

Utilize the modules


A61P

AY42

AY42

AY42

AY41

AY41

A61P

AY42

AY42

AY42

AY41

AY41

and extension base unit. *


QA6 Extension stage
ADP number setting: 3rd stage
A65B Y240... A65B Y240...
* The extension stage number of the QA conversion adapter
The adapter allows the A (Large Type) Series extension base unit to be
should be set in accordance with that of the extension base unit.
used as the QCPU's extension base unit. (Max. 7 extension stages)

66
3.1 Utilize existing A (Large Type)/AnS, QnAS (Small Type) modules

B. Module selection example

Product name Existing module Replacement module


Power supply module (Q Series new) N/A - Q61P 1
Power supply module (for extension base unit) A61P (main/extension base unit) 3 Utilize existing module -
CPU module A3ACPU 1 Q03UDCPU*1 1
Main base unit A35B 1 Q35B*2 1
Extension base unit (1st stage) N/A - QA65B*3 1
Extension base unit A65B Utilize existing module -
2
QA conversion adapter module N/A - QA6ADP 2
Extension cable N/A - QC06B* 4 3
Input module Use existing module in original state
Output module Use existing module in original state
*1: Select the module depending on the existing program capacity and contents.
*2: Used to mount the Q Series CPU.
*3: Used to mount modules on the existing main base unit.
*4: Select the cable length according to the arrangement of base units.

Tip
• The existing A (Large type) Series extension base unit and mounted modules can be utilized without wiring
modification.
The existing A (Large Type) Series extension base unit can be used without modifying the wiring by replacing
with the extension base QA6�B, and remounting the mounted modules.
• Program modifications can be minimized by using the same I/O address for the existing units and setting the
current I/O addresses with the parameter I/O assignments.
• The following A (Large Type) Series module cannot be used with the Q Series CPU. These must be changed
to a Q Series CPU compatible module.
CC-Link master/local module
MELSECNET/10 network module
Ethernet module
Ethernet module, computer link module
etc.
• The A (Large Type) Series A6�B/A5�B extension base unit with the QA6ADP cannot be used together with
the QA1S6�B extension base unit.
• When an AC input module is mounted on the “A5�B” extension base unit (without power supply) using the
QA6ADP, either the “A6�B with QA6ADP” or “QA6�B” extension base unit (with power supply) is required in
the system.
• Set the stage number for QA6ADP according to the setting of the extension base unit.
• The QA6ADP QA conversion adapter is only compatible with High Performance Model QCPU or Universal
Model QCPU (first five digits of serial No. “13102” or higher).
Basic Model QCPUs, Process CPUs, Redundant CPUs, Safety CPUs, and Remote I/O Stations are not
compatible.
• For the precautions and restrictions when using QA conversion adapter, refer to "QA6ADP QA Conversion
Adapter Module User’s Manual".

67
3.1 Utilize existing A (Large Type)/AnS, QnAS (Small Type) modules

3.1.3 Utilize AnS/QnAS (Small Type) Series QA1S6�B extension base unit
Solution and Benefit
•By using the current AnS/QnAS (Small Type) module, the wiring work during replacement can be
reduced. Replacements can be completed in a short time.
•Replacement is possible even if a compatible Q Series module is not available.
•If an extension base unit is connected to the current AnS/QnAS (Small Type) series, it can be used
together with the A/QnA (Large Type) QA6�B extension base unit.

The CPU can be replaced with the QCPU. An example of using a current A (Large Type) module without
modification to shorten the re-wiring man-hours is shown below.

● Instructions
(1) Only the CPU is replaced to the Q Series. The current I/O module is used.
Replace the existing AnS/QnAS (Small Type) main base A1S35B to QA1S65B, and mount the existing
module.
(2) If the module must be replaced with the Q Series, select the module and then mount on the Q Series main
base unit.
(3) Avoid changing the current I/O assignments.

A. System configuration example (1)


Current configuration After replacement
Replace AnS/QnAS (Small Type)
CPU with QCPU
Q61P
Q01U

E71-100
CPU

Empty

Empty
QJ71
A2SHCPU
A1S61PN

A1SY41P

A1SY41P
A1SX41

A1SX41

A1SJ71
E71N

Q33B
X00∼ QC06B
A1S35B
Extension base stage 1

Replace AnS (Small Type)


A1S61PN

A1SY41P

A1SY41P

main base with QA1S�B,


A1SX41

A1SX41

Empty

and mount modules

X00∼
QA1S65B
Empty slot for replacing to
B. Module selection example Q Series module

Product name Existing module Replacement module


Power supply module (new) N/A ― Q61P 1
Power supply module (for extension base) A1S61PN 1 Utilize existing module ―
CPU module A2SHCPU 1 Q01UCPU 1
Main base unit A1S35B 1 Q33B*1 1
Extension base unit N/A ― QA1S65B*2 1
Connection cable N/A ― QC06B*3 1
Input module Use existing module in original state
Output module Use existing module in original state
Ethernet interface module A1SJ71E71N-T 1 QJ71E71-100*4 1
*1: Used to mount the Q Series CPU.
*2: Used to mount modules on existing main base unit.
*3: Select the cable length according to the arrangement of base units.
*4: Must be replaced with Q Series module.
68
3.1 Utilize existing A (Large Type)/AnS, QnAS (Small Type) modules

C. System configuration example (2)

Current configuration After replacement


Replace AnS/QnAS (Small Type)
CPU with QCPU

E71-100
Q01U
Q61P

CPU

Empty

Empty
QJ71
A2SHCPU
A1S61PN

A1SY41P

A1SY41P
A1SX41

A1SX41

A1SJ71
E71N
Q33B
X00∼ QC06B
A1S35B Extension base stage 1

Replace AnS (Small Type)

A1S61PN

A1SY41P

A1SY41P
A1SX41

A1SX41
main base with QA1S6�B,

Empty
and mount modules

AC06B X00∼
QA1S65B
Empty slot for replacing
QC06B with Q Series module
Extension base stage 1 Replace A (Large Type) Extension base stage 2
extension base QA6�B,
and mount modules

A68AD
A68AD
AY41P

AY41P

AY41P

AY41P
A61P

AX41

AX41

A61P

AX41

AX41
XD0∼ XD0∼
A65B QA65B

The QA1S extension base and mounted large type QA6ADP extension
base cannot be used together, so base must be replaced.
D. Module selection example
Product name Existing module Replacement module
Power supply module (new) N/A ― Q61P 1
Power supply module (for extension base 1st stage) A1S61PN 1 Utilize existing module ―
CPU module A2SHCPU 1 Q01UCPU 1
Main base unit A1S35B 1 Q33B*1 1
Extension base unit (1st stage) N/A ― QA1S65B*2 1
Connection cable N/A ― QC06B*3 1
AnS (Small Type) input module Use existing module in original state
AnS (Small Type) output module Use existing module in original state
Ethernet interface module A1SJ71E71N-T 1 QJ71E71-100*4 1
Power supply module (for extension base 2nd stage) A61P 1 Utilize existing module ―
Extension base unit (2nd stage) A65B 1 QA65B*5 1
Connection cable AC06B 1 QC06B*3 1
A (Large Type) input module Use existing module in original state
A (Large Type) output module Use existing module in original state
A (Large Type) analog I/O module Use existing module in original state
*1: Used to mount the Q Series CPU.
*2: Used to mount modules on existing main base unit.
*3: Select the cable length according to the arrangement of base units.
*4: Must be replaced to Q Series module.
*5: For re-mounting existing A large type extension base unit

69
3.1 Utilize existing A (Large Type)/AnS, QnAS (Small Type) modules

Tip
• The existing AnS/QnAS (Small Type) main base unit can be used without modifying the wiring by replacing
with the extension base QA1S6�B and remounting the mounted modules.
The existing A (Large Type) extension base unit can be used without modifying the wiring by replacing with
the extension base QA6�B, and remounting the mounted modules.
• The QA1S6�B extension base unit cannot be used together with the A (Large Type) extension base A6�B/
A5�B) onto which QA6ADP is mounted.
When using a module mounted on the existing A (Large Type) extension base unit, replace the base unit
with the QA6�B extension base.
• Connect the base units in the following order.
Q Series main base unit → Q Series extension base unit → QA1S6�B extension base → QA6�B
extension base
The GOT bus cannot be connected when the QA6�B extension base is connected.
The GOT bus can be connected when only the QA1S6�B extension bus is connected.
• Program modifications can be minimized by using the same I/O address for the existing units and setting the
current I/O addresses with the parameter I/O assignments.
• The following A/QnA (Large Type) module and AnS/QnAS (Small Type) module cannot be used with the Q
Series CPU.
These must be changed to a Q Series CPU compatible module.
CC-Link master/local module
MELSECNET/10 network module
Ethernet module, computer link module, etc.
• The QA1S6�B extension base and QA6�B extension base are only compatible with High Performance
Model QCPU or Universal Model QCPU (first five digits of serial No. “13102” or higher).
Basic Model QCPUs, Process CPUs, Redundant CPUs, Safety CPUs, and Remote I/O Stations are not
compatible.

70
3.1 Utilize existing A (Large Type)/AnS, QnAS (Small Type) modules

3.1.4 Utilize existing A (Large Type) and AnS (Small Type) modules without changing I/O addresses

Solution and Benefit


• The I/O addresses do not need to be changed when reutilizing existing A (Large Type) and AnS
(Small Type) modules with Q Series CPU and mounting the modules on QA6�B/A6�B+QA6ADP
or QA1S6�B. This can greatly reduce program modification time.
• The A (Large Type) and AnS (Small Type) modules can be used with the same I/O addresses, so
there is no need to change the external wiring numbers.

The following is an example of how to reuse the program without modifying the I/O addresses when replacing the
CPU with a Q Series CPU and keeping the existing I/O modules on a QA extension base unit.

● I/O assignment example


When utilizing existing A (Large Type) and AnS (Small Type) modules with the Q Series CPU, set the existing
module’s I/O addresses to the existing addresses with the PC parameter I/O assignment settings. Assign the
addresses for the modules mounted onto the main base unit after the existing module. This will greatly reduce
program modification time.

A. System configuration example (same as in 3.1.1)

Current configuration After replacement


Q06UDHCPU

QJ71E71-100
QJ61BT11N

QJ71BR11

Empty

Empty
Q61P
AJ71E71N3-T

Q35B
A68DAI-S1

AJ71BR11
AJ61BT11
A3NCPU

A68AD

A68AD
A61P

AX41

Replace
AY10

A38B
A68DAI-S1
A68AD

A68AD
Empty

Empty

Empty
A61P

AX41

AY10

QA68B

71
3.1 Utilize existing A (Large Type)/AnS, QnAS (Small Type) modules

B. Parameter setting example

Model Type Point Address


0 QJ61BT11N Intelli 32 100
1 QJ71BR11 Intelli 32 120
Main base unit
2 QJ71E71-100 Intelli 32 140
(Q38B)
3 N/A Empty 16 160
4 N/A Empty 16 170

Model Type Point Address


5 AX41 Input 32 00
6 N/A Empty 32 20
7 AY10 Output 16 40
Extesion base unit 8 A68AD Intelli 32 50
(QA68B) 9 A68AD Intelli 32 70
10 A68DAI-S1 Intelli 32 90
11 N/A Empty 32 B0
12 N/A Empty 32 D0

Tip
• Assign the I/O numbers in the following order: Q Series to A Series or A Series to Q Series.
• When the order is mixed (i.e., Q Series -> A Series -> Q Series), the CPU does not start up due to an error.

72
MEMO

73
4.1 Replace MELSECNET(ΙΙ) with MELSECNET/10

4. Replacement of MELSECNET Network System


4.1 Replace MELSECNET(ΙΙ) with MELSECNET/10
4.1.1 Replace MELSECNET(II) coaxial loop with MELSECNET/10 coaxial bus system
while retaining existing A Series CPUs

Solution and Benefit


• When an existing MELSECNET(ΙΙ) system consists of many stations, the complete network
system can be upgraded to MELSECNET/10 while reusing existing cable installations.
• By upgrading the entire network at once, the current network parameter settings can be used.
• Once the network is updated, A Series stations can be replaced with the Q Series in any order
until all the stations are upgraded to the Q Series.

The following is an example of replacing a MELSECNET(ΙΙ) coaxial loop system's master station with a Q Series
system and upgrading the network to a MELSECNET/10 coaxial bus system.

● Instructions
(1) Replace one of the MELSECNET(ΙΙ) stations with the Q Series.
(2) Replace the complete MELSECNET(ΙΙ) system with MELSECNET/10 coaxial bus system.
(3) Replace the CPU of each station with Q Series CPU sequentially, and eventually replace all CPUs with Q
Series CPUs.
(4) Use the existing settings for the network parameters.
A. System configuration example
Current configuration Transitional step 1
Master station Control station
QJ71BR11
I/O module

I/O module
Power supply

A2NCPUR21

Q02U
I/O module

I/O module

CPU
Q61P
Empty
module

NET/10 (Coaxial bus) R


NET/ΙΙ (Coaxial loop)
A2NCPUR21

A2NCPUR21
Power supply

Power supply

AJ71BR11
I/O module

I/O module

I/O module

I/O module
Empty
module

module

A1SJ71BR11
A1SJ71AR21
Power supply

Power supply

Initial Second
I/O module

I/O module

I/O module

I/O module
A2SHCPU

A2SHCPU

replacement replacement
module

module
Power supply

Power supply
A2NCPUR21

A2NCPUR21
I/O module

I/O module

I/O module

I/O module

AJ71BR11
Empty
module

module
Power supply

Power supply
A2NCPUR21

A2NCPUR21

AJ71BR11
I/O module

I/O module

I/O module

I/O module
Empty
module

module

R
74
4.1 Replace MELSECNET(ΙΙ) with MELSECNET/10

Tip
Unless the existing network is in MELSECNET mode or MELSECNET ΙΙ mode and only the first half is set, the
network parameter settings need to be changed.
If the second half of settings have been made in the MELSECNET ΙΙ mode or MELSECNET ΙΙ composite
mode, the B and W station send range must be reset, and the station’s inherent parameters must be set, etc.
Furthermore, when AnNCPUs, AnACPUs or AnSCPUs are part of the system, the program should be modified
because station inherent parameters cannot be set.
For precautions regarding the existing MELSECNET(ΙΙ) system configuration, refer to “Transition from
MELSEC-A/QnA (Large Type), AnS/QnAS (Small Type) Series to Q Series Handbook (Network Modules)”.

Transitional step 2 Transition completed

Control station Control station


QJ71BR11

QJ71BR11
I/O module

I/O module

I/O module

I/O module
Q02U

Q02U
CPU

CPU
Q61P

Q61P

R R QJ71BR11
I/O module

I/O module
A2NCPUR21

AJ71BR11
Power supply

I/O module

I/O module

Q02U
CPU
Q61P
module

QJ71BR11

QJ71BR11
I/O module

I/O module

I/O module

I/O module
Q01U

Q01U

Final
CPU

CPU
Q61P

Q61P

replacement
QJ71BR11
I/O module

I/O module
Power supply

Q02U
A2NCPUR21

I/O module

I/O module

AJ71BR11

CPU
Q61P
module

QJ71BR11

QJ71BR11
I/O module

I/O module

I/O module

I/O module
Q02U

Q02U
CPU

CPU
Q61P

Q61P

R R

75
4.1 Replace MELSECNET(ΙΙ) with MELSECNET/10

4.1.2 Upgrade to MELSECNET/H network system utilizing existing MELSECNET/B twisted pair cable
Solution and Benefit
When replacing A (Large Type) Series CPU with Q Series CPU in a MELSECNET/B data link
system, the network can be effortlessly updated to twisted bus type MELSECNET/H (PLC to PLC
network) because the existing MELSECNET/B twisted pair cable can be directly utilized. (New cable
installation is not required.)

The following is an example of replacing MELSECNET/B with twisted bus type MELSECNET/H (PLC to PLC
network) utilizing the existing twisted pair cable.
● Instructions
(1) Replace all A Series CPUs found in the existing MELSECNET/B system with Q Series CPUs.
(2) Utilize the existing MELSECNET/B twisted pair cable.
(3) Modify the terminals of the network modules because the cable connection method has been changed from
screw terminal block type to spring clamp terminal block type.

A. System configuration example

Current configuration Existing MELSECNET/B (ACPU+AJ71AT21B)

Master station Local station Local station

Upgrade to Q Series modules


Replace

After replacement MELSECNET/H (PLC to PLC network)(QCPU+QJ71NT11B)

Control station Normal station Normal station

* The existing MELSECNET/B twisted pair cable and terminating resistor are utilized.
(Terminal modification is required.)

76
4.1 Replace MELSECNET(ΙΙ) with MELSECNET/10

B. Specifications of MELSECNET/H (PLC to PLC network)


The following table shows the specifications of twisted bus type MELSECNET/H (PLC to PLC network).
MELSECNET/H(PLC to PLC network)Twisted bus type
Item
QJ71NT11B
LX/LY 8192 points
Maximum number of
LB 16384 points
link points per network
LW 16384 points
Maximum number of link •MELSECNET/H mode {(LY + LB) / 8 + (2 × LW)} ≤ 2000 bytes
points per station •MELSECNET/H Extended mode {(LY + LB) / 8 + (2 × LW)} ≤ 35840 bytes
156 kbps/312 kbps/625 kbps/1.25 Mbps/2.5 Mbps/5 Mbps/10 Mbps
Communication speed
(Switched by network parameters)
Number of stations per network Up to 32 stations (1 control station, 31 normal stations)
Connection cable Twisted pair cable or CC-Link Ver.1.10-compatible cable

Communication speed Twisted pair cable CC-Link Ver.1.10-compatible cable


156 kbps 1200 m 1200 m
312 kbps 600 m 900 m
625 kbps 400 m 600 m
Overall distance for one network
1.25 Mbps 200 m 400 m
2.5 Mbps 200 m
-
5 Mbps 150 m
(Not applicable)
10 Mbps 100 m

C. Usable twisted pair cable for twisted bus type (Same specifications as those of MELSECNET/B)
The following table shows the specifications of twisted pair cable that can be used for twisted bus type
MELSECNET/H (PLC to PLC network)*.
Item KNPEV-SB 0.5SQ x 1P (Applicable only when the communication speed is 1.25 Mbps or less.)

Blue
Cross section
White

Cable Shielded twisted pair cable


Core 2-core
Conductor resistance (20˚C) 39.4 Ω/km or less
Insulation resistance (20˚C) 10 MΩ/km or more
Dielectric withstand voltage V-min 1000 V AC 1 minute
Capacitance (1 kHz) 70 nF/km or less on average
Characteristic impedance (100 kHz) 110 ± 10 Ω

* The cable terminal (the part where it connects to the module) is a bar solderless terminal.
When utilizing MELSECNET/B twisted pair cable, solderless terminals need to be changed
to bar solderless terminals. For details on the bar solderless terminal and tools dedicated to it,
refer to "Q corresponding MELSECNET/H Network System Reference Manual
(PLC to PLC network)": SH-080049.

77
4.1 Replace MELSECNET(ΙΙ) with MELSECNET/10

Tip
• MELSECNET/H (twisted bus type) is compatible with Q Series CPUs only.
All A Series CPUs connected to the existing MELSECNET/B need to be upgraded to Q Series CPUs at once.
• MELSECNET/H (twisted bus type) is compatible with PLC to PLC network only. It is not compatible with
remote I/O network.
To replace MELSECNET/B with MELSECNET/H (remote I/O network), use optical loop system or coaxial
bus system.
Or, replace MELSECNET/B with MELSECNET/H (PLC to PLC network) and remote I/O stations with normal
stations. (Refer to Section 4.3)
• For details on Q Series CPU type to which MELSECNET/H network module (twisted bus type: QJ71NT11B)
can be mounted, number of mountable modules per CPU, and network parameter settings, refer to the
following manual.
"Q corresponding MELSECNET/H Network System Reference Manual (PLC to PLC network)" : SH-080049
• MELSECNET/H (twisted bus type) can use CC-Link cables. The maximum communication speed of the
network is 10 Mbps.

78
MEMO

79
4.2 Replace one of A Series stations with Q Series while retaining MELSECNET(ΙΙ)

4.2 Replace one of A Series stations with Q Series while retaining MELSECNET(ΙΙ)
4.2.1 Replace A Series local station with Q Series
Solution and Benefit
• Using a local station data link module, the Q Series can directly connect to existing
MELSECNET(ΙΙ) network as a local station. Existing wiring can be utilized, and network parameter
modification is not required.
• Local station data link modules for optical fiber loop, coaxial loop, and MELSECNET/B are
provided to support all types of existing networks.

The following is an example of replacing one of A Series local stations with the Q Series.
● Instructions
Replace the CPU and other modules on one of the A Series local stations with the Q Series, and mount the
MELSECNET(ΙΙ) local station data link module on the QA1S6�B extension base unit.
A. System configuration example
Current configuration After replacing local station with Q
Master station Master station
Power supply

Power supply
A3ACPUP21

A3ACPUP21
I/O module

I/O module

I/O module

I/O module

I/O module

I/O module
No change
module

module
MELSECNET(ΙΙ) (optical loop)
MELSECNET(ΙΙ) (optical loop) Local station 1
Q03UD

I/O module

I/O module

I/O module
CPU

Local station 1
Q61P

Q38B
Power supply

A3ACPUP21

I/O module

I/O module

I/O module

Replace QC�B
module

A1SJ71AP
A1S61PN

Empty

Empty

Empty
23Q

QA1S65B

Local station 2
Local station 2
Power supply

A2ACPUP21

I/O module

I/O module

I/O module
Power supply

A2ACPUP21

No change
I/O module

I/O module

I/O module

module
module

(including optical fiber cables)

Local station 3 Local station 3


I/O module

I/O module

I/O module
Q02U
CPU
Q61P
Power supply

Replace
A2NCPUP21

I/O module

I/O module

I/O module
module

Q38B
QC06B
A1SJ71AP
23Q

QA1S51B
80
4.2 Replace one of A Series stations with Q Series while retaining MELSECNET(ΙΙ)

B. Module selection example


(Local station 1)
Product name Existing module Replacement module
Power supply module A61P 1 Q61P 1
CPU module A3ACPUP21 1 Q03UDCPU 1
Main base unit A38B 1 Q38B 1
Input module AX� — QX� —
Output module AY� — QY� —
MELSECNET(ΙΙ) local station data link module Embedded in CPU module 1 A1SJ71AP23Q 1
Extension base (for A1S Series module) N/A — QA1S65B 1
Extension Power supply module
N/A — A1S61PN 1
(for A1S Series module)
Extension cable N/A — QC06B 1

(Local station 3)
Product name Existing module Replacement module
Power supply module A61P 1 Q61P 1
CPU module A2NCPU21 1 Q02UCPU 1
Main base unit A38B 1 Q38B 1
Input module AX�� — QX�� —
Output module AY�� — QY�� —
MELSECNET(ΙΙ) local station data link module Embedded in CPU module — A1SJ71AP23Q 1
Extension base (for A1S Series module) N/A — QA1S51B* * 1 2
1
Extension cable N/A — QC06B 1
*1: QA1S51B is an extension base that does not require a power supply, so if the extension cable is long, a voltage drop could
prevent the specified voltage from being supplied. Always calculate the voltage drop.
*2: QA1S51B only has an IN type extension connector, so it will be the extension final stage. QA6�B (Large Type) extension base
cannot be connected below QA1S51B.

C. Local station data link module options


Model Outline
A1SJ71AP23Q MELSECNET(ΙΙ) local station data link module for SI optical fiber cable
A1SJ71AR23Q MELSECNET(ΙΙ) local station data link module for coaxial cable
A1SJ71AT23BQ MELSECNET/B local station data link module for shielded twisted pair cable

Tip
• Except for the local station replaced with the Q Series, modification to the system configuration and programs
are not required.
• Minimal setup is required, as network parameter settings (excluding link refresh setting) are automatically
detected by the local station data link module. FROM/TO instructions within sequence program (refresh
program) are required to enable send/receive cyclic data.
A sample program to enable send/receive of cyclic data can be created by "A/QnA -> Q conversion support
tool" (which can be downloaded from the MELFANSweb). (Refer to Chapter 11)
• If slots are left empty in the replacement Q Series CPU after connecting the A (Large Type) extension base
onto which the QA6�B extension base unit or QA conversion adapter QA6ADP is connected, the
MELSECNET(II), /B local station data link module can be connected using the A-A1S conversion adapter.
QA1S6�B or QA1S51B do not need to be additionally selected in this case.

81
4.2 Replace one of A Series stations with Q Series while retaining MELSECNET(ΙΙ)

4.2.2 Replace A Series master station with Q Series


The following is an example of replacing the A Series master station with Q Series.

● Instructions
(1) Replace the CPU and other modules on the master station with Q Series while maintaining the existing
network.
(2) Since a Q Series station cannot be the master station, set Local station 1 as the master station, set the link
parameters, and change the station number of the rest of the local stations.
(3) Utilize the existing optical fiber cables.
A. System configuration example

Current configuration Change to local station after replacing master station with QCPU
Master station
Local station 3
Power supply

I/O module

I/O module

I/O module
Q02H
A3ACPUP21

CPU
I/O module

I/O module

I/O module

Q61P
Replace
module

Q38B
QC�B

A1SJ71AP
A1S61PN

Empty

Empty

Empty
MELSECNET(ΙΙ) (optical loop)

23Q
QA1S65B

MELSECNET(ΙΙ) (optical loop)

Local station 1 Master station


Power supply

Power supply
A3ACPUP21

A3ACPUP21
I/O module

I/O module

I/O module

I/O module

I/O module

I/O module
module

module

Local station 2 Local station 1


Power supply

Power supply
A2ACPUP21

A2ACPUP21
I/O module

I/O module

I/O module

I/O module

I/O module

I/O module

No change
module

module

(including optical fiber cables)

Local station 3 Local station 2


Power supply

Power supply
A2NCPUP21

A2NCPUP21
I/O module

I/O module

I/O module

I/O module

I/O module

I/O module
module

module

Note: In MELSECNET(II) mode and MELSECNET(II) composite mode, only AnA, AnU, or QnA CPU can be used
for the master station.
82
4.2 Replace one of A Series stations with Q Series while retaining MELSECNET(ΙΙ)

B. Module selection example

Product name Existing model Replacement model


Power supply module A61P 1 Q61P 1
CPU module A3ACPUP21 1 Q02HCPU 1
Main base unit A38B 1 Q38B 1
Input module AX� — QX� —
Output module AY� — QY� —
MELSECNET(Ⅱ) local station data link module Embedded in CPU module 1 A1SJ71AP23Q 1
Extension base (for A1S Series module) N/A — QA1S65B 1
Extension Power supply module
N/A — A1S61PN 1
(for A1S Series module)
Extension cable N/A — QC06B 1

C. Link parameter settings (MELSECNET(ΙΙ) composite mode)

Send range (first half) Send range (second half) Station No. Send range (first half) Send range (second half)
Station No.
Points Start End Points Start End Current New Points Start End Points Start End
M 256 000 0FF 256 500 5FF IIL1 M 256 100 1FF 256 600 6FF
Replace
IIL1 256 100 1FF 256 600 6FF IIL2 IIL1 256 200 2FF 256 700 7FF
IIL2 256 200 2FF 256 700 7FF L3 L2 256 300 3FF - - -
L3 256 300 3FF - - - M IIL3 256 000 0FF 256 500 5FF

Tip
• The data link module was designed for local stations and cannot be set as master station. For this reason, a
local station that is upgraded to Q Series cannot become the master station. Instead, one of the existing A
Series local stations should be set as the master station. The station numbers should be changed
accordingly, but the I/O address and parameters can remain the same.
• Minimal setup is required, as network parameter settings (excluding link refresh setting) are automatically
detected by the local station data link module. FROM/TO instructions within sequence program (refresh
program) are required to enable send/receive cyclic data.
A sample program to enable send/receive of cyclic data can be created by "A/QnA -> Q conversion support
tool" (which can be downloaded from the MELFANSweb). (Refer to Chapter 11)
• For MELSECNET(Ⅱ), the station numbers must be assigned in the connecting order starting from the new
master station.
• The QA1S51B extension base without power supply module can be used for the local station data link
module mounting base.
Note that the voltage drop must be calculated if the extension cable is long.

83
4.3 Replace MELSECNET containing a remote I/O station with MELSECNET/H

4.3 Replace MELSECNET containing a remote I/O station with MELSECNET/H

Solution and Benefit


• Although MELSECNET systems may be a combination of local and remote I/O stations, two
separate networks are necessary when upgrading to Q Series. However, if the existing system
contains only a few remote I/O stations, only one network is needed if remote I/O stations are
replaced with normal (local) stations without changing the cable layout or adding new wiring.
• Even when the remote I/O stations are replaced with the normal stations, it is not required to
modify the control (master) station’s network related programs.

The following is an example of upgrading a MELSECNET(ΙΙ) system to MELSECNET/H by replacing both local
and remote I/O stations with normal stations.

● Instructions
(1) Replace the MELSECNET(ΙΙ) master station with the MELSECNET/H control station, and the
MELSECNET(ΙΙ) local and remote I/O stations with the MELSECNET/H normal stations to maintain a single
network configuration. (This is because the controller network and remote I/O network cannot reside on a
single network.)
(2) Add a simple transfer program between LX/LY (link side device) and X/Y (actual I/O device) for the normal
station replaced from the remote I/O station. With this program, the normal station receives LY sent from
the control station by X and transfers it to actual output address Y; the normal station transfers input X to LY
so that the control station can receive it as X.
• MELSECNET(ΙΙ): I/O signal transfer between master station and remote station
- Master station input (X) <- Remote station input (X)
- Master station output (Y) -> Remote station output (Y)
• MELSECNET/H: I/O signal transfer between control station and normal station
- Control station input (X) <- Normal station output (Y)
- Control station output (Y) -> Normal station input (X)

84
Q61P Q61P Q61P Power supply Power supply Power supply
module module module
Q06UDH Q06UDH Q06UDH
CPU CPU CPU A3USHCPU-S1 A3ACPUP21 A3ACPUP21
Current configuration

I/O module I/O module QJ71LP21-25


Master station

I/O module I/O module I/O module


I/O module I/O module I/O module
I/O module I/O module I/O module

Local station: Station 2


Local station: Station 1
I/O module I/O module I/O module

Nomal station: Station 2


Nomal station: Station 1
Control station (Station 5)
I/O module I/O module I/O module
I/O module I/O module I/O module

New configuration after replacement


A. System configuration example

I/O module I/O module I/O module


QJ71LP21-25 QJ71LP21-25 I/O module

A1SJ71AP21 I/O module I/O module

MELSECNET/H optical loop


MELSECNET(ΙΙ) optical loop

85
Replace
Q61P Q61P Power supply Power supply
module module
Q02U Q06UDH
CPU CPU AJ72P25 A3ACPUP21

I/O module I/O module


I/O module I/O module
I/O module I/O module
I/O module I/O module
Local station: Station 4

I/O module I/O module

Nomal station: Station 4


I/O module I/O module

Normal station: Station 3


Remote station: Station 3

I/O module I/O module

I/O module I/O module


QJ71LP21-25 QJ71LP21-25

(replacement of remote I/O station)


I/O module I/O module
4.3 Replace MELSECNET containing a remote I/O station with MELSECNET/H
4.3 Replace MELSECNET containing a remote I/O station with MELSECNET/H

B. Network parameter modification example


(1) Parameter settings for existing MELSECNET(ΙΙ) master station

LBLW Setting

L/R Trans range Trans range M sta -> R sta M sta <- R sta
Station No. LB LW LW LW
Start End Start End Start End Start End
M [ 0] - [ FF] [ 0] - [ FF]
[L] 1 [ 100] - [ 1FF] [ 100] - [ 1FF]
[L] 2 [ 200] - [ 2FF] [ 200] - [ 2FF]
[R] 3 [ ]-[ ] [ ]-[ ]
[L] 4 [ 300] - [ 3FF] [ 300] - [ 3FF]

LXLY Setting

L/R M sta -> L/R sta M sta <- L/R sta


Station No. LY LX/LY LX LX/LY
Start End Start End Start End Start End
M
[L] 1 [ ]-[ ] [ ]-[ ] [ ]-[ ] [ ]-[ ]
[L] 2 [ ]-[ ] [ ]-[ ] [ ]-[ ] [ ]-[ ]
[R] 3 [ 500] - [ 5FF] [ 0] - [ FF] [ 500] - [ 5FF] [ 0] - [ FF]
[L] 4 [ ]-[ ] [ ]-[ ] [ ]-[ ] [ ]-[ ]

(2) Parameter settings for MELSECNET/H control station


(a) MELSECNET/Ethernet network parameter settings
Mdl. 1 Mdl. 2 Mdl. 3 Mdl. 4
Network type MNET/H mode(Ctr Sta)
Start I/O No. 0100
Network No. 1
Total stations 5
Group No. 0
Station No. ----------
Mode Online
Network range alloc.set.exist
No sta.inher.para.settings
Refresh para. settings exist
No interrupt settings

86
4.3 Replace MELSECNET containing a remote I/O station with MELSECNET/H

(b) Network range assignment


LB/LW Settings
Trans range Trans range Trans range Trans range
Pairing
LB LW Low speed LB Low speed LW
Station No. Points Start End Points Start End Points Start End Points Start End
1 256 0100 01FF 256 0100 01FF Disable
2 256 0200 02FF 256 0200 02FF Disable
3 Disable
4 256 0300 03FF 256 0300 03FF Disable
Master1 5 16 0000 000F 256 0000 00FF Disable

LX/LY Settings (1)


Trans range (M -> L) Trans range (M <- L)
LY LX LX LY
Station No. Points Start End Points Start End Points Start End Points Start End
1
2
3 256 0500 05FF 256 0500 05FF 256 0500 05FF 256 0500 05FF
4
Master1 5 ---- ---- ---- ---- ---- ---- ---- ---- ---- ---- ---- ----

(c) Refresh parameters

Link side PLC side

Points Start End Points Start End

SB Transfer 512 SB0000 SB01FF <--> 512 SB0000 SB01FF

SW Transfer 512 SW0000 SW01FF <--> 512 SW0000 SW01FF

Transfer 1 8192 LB0000 LB1FFF <--> 8192 B0 B1FFF

Transfer 2 8192 LW0000 LW1FFF <--> 8192 W0 W1FFF

Transfer 3 256 LX0500 LX05FF <--> 256 X500 X5FF

Transfer 4 256 LY0500 LY05FF <--> 256 Y500 Y5FF

87
4.3 Replace MELSECNET containing a remote I/O station with MELSECNET/H

(3) Parameter settings and link data transfer program for the normal station replaced from the remote I/O station
(a) MELSECNET/Ethernet network parameter settings
Mdl. 1 Mdl. 2 Mdl. 3 Mdl. 4
Network type MNET/H mode(Nor Sta)
Start I/O No. 0100
Network No. 1
Total stations ----------
Group No. 0
Station No. ----------
Mode Online
----------
No sta.inher.para.settings
Refresh para. settings exist
No interrupt settings
----------
----------
----------
----------
----------

(b) Refresh parameters

Link side PLC side

Points Start End Points Start End

SB Transfer 512 SB0000 SB01FF <--> 512 SB0000 SB01FF

SW Transfer 512 SW0000 SW01FF <--> 512 SW0000 SW01FF

Transfer 1 256 LX0500 LX05FF <--> 256 X500 X5FF

Transfer 2 256 LY0500 LY05FF <--> 256 Y500 Y5FF

(c) Transfer program between link data (LX/LY) and actual I/O (X/Y)

SM400
0 BMOV K4X500 K4Y0 K16
Always ON Control Host
station station
receive output module
data start address
BMOV K4X0 K4Y500 K16
Host Control
station station
input module receive
start address data
9 END

88
4.4 Gradual replacement of MELSECNET/10 Remote I/O Net

4.4 Gradual replacement of MELSECNET/10 Remote I/O Net


(Utilize QJ72LP25-25(G), QJ72BR15 (MELSECNET/10 mode))

Solution and Benefit


Replace the remote I/O station only in a station unit to the Q Series remote I/O station while utilizing
the current AnU(S)CPU/QnA(S)CPU master station. This allows gradual replacement of the network
to the Q Series.

List of MELSECNET/H (MELSECNET/10 mode) remote I/O network modules


MELSECNET/10 remote MELSECNET/H (MELSECNET/10 mode) MELSECNET/H remote
(current system) (gradual replacement) (final replacement configuration)
CPU module AnU(S)CPU/QnA(S)CPU QCPU
Remote master A(1S)J71(Q)LP21 QJ72LP21
station module A(1S)(Q)BR11 QJ72BR11

QJ72LP25-25 QJ72LP25-25
A(1S)J72(Q)LP25
A(1S)J72(Q)LP25 QJ72BR15 QJ72BR15
Remote I/O A(1S)J72(Q)LP25G
A(1S)J72(Q)LP25G QJ72LP25G QJ72LP25G
A(1S)J72(Q)BR15
station module A(1S)J72(Q)BR15 * Set mode switch to 8 * Set mode switch to 0

Mixing possible

Tip
• Replace the MELSECNET/10 mode master station CPU
The Q Series master station cannot be connected to the A/AnS remote I/O station. When replacing the
current master station with the Q Series in the final stage, all remote I/O stations must be Q Series stations.
• Replace the A Series special module with the Q Series intelligent function module
The Q Series intelligent function module’s buffer memory can be read/written using the current A/QnA Series
dedicated instructions.
The sequence program must be revised as the number of occupied points, I/O signals and buffer memory
address may change.
• Replace master station CPU to Q Series in final step
(a) Using only I/O module
The network can be shifted to the MELSECNET/H remote I/O network by changing the mode switch
setting from 8 to 0. There is no need to change the program.
(b) Using the intelligent function module
• The network can be shifted to the MELSECNET/H remote I/O network by changing the mode switch
setting from 8 to 0.
• The Q Series intelligent function module’s buffer memory read/write instructions must be changed to Q
Series link dedicated instructions. Refer to the “Q Series Compatible MELSECNET/H Remote I/O
module reference Manual (MELSECNET/10 Mode Section)” for details on the dedicated instructions.
Note:
This replacement is intended for an existing MELSECNET/10 remote I/O network system.
Replacement from the MELSECNET (II, II mixed) or MELSECNET/B data link system is not supported.

89
4.4 Gradual replacement of MELSECNET/10 Remote I/O Net

The method for gradually replacing the existing MELSECNET/10 remote I/O network to the Q Series is explained
below.

● Flow of replacement
(1) Replace the existing station 1 with the Q Series in Step 1.
(2) Replace a random station with the Q Series in Step 2.
(3) In the final step, replace the master station with the Q Series CPU, and shift to the MELSECNET/H remote
I/O network.
At the same time, replace the stations remaining in the existing network as MELSECNET/10 remote I/O
network modules to the Q Series.

A. System configuration example


* Replacing only R1 station with Q Series
(Master station, R2, R3 not replaced)
Current configuration Transitional step 1

Master station Master station


I/O module

I/O module

I/O module

I/O module

I/O module

I/O module
No change
A Series

A Series

A Series

A Series

A Series

A Series
A61P

A61P
LP21

LP21
AJ71

AJ71
CPU

CPU
A3U

A3U
MELSECNET/10 remote I/O network (optical) MELSECNET/10 remote I/O network (optical)

R1 station R1 station
I/O module

I/O module

I/O module
LP25-25
Q Series

Q Series

Q Series
I/O module

I/O module

I/O module

QJ72

Replace
Q61P
A Series

A Series

A Series
QLP25
A61P

AJ72

Set Mode to 8

R2 station R2 station
I/O module

I/O module

I/O module

I/O module

I/O module

I/O module

No change
A Series

A Series

A Series

A Series

A Series

A Series
QLP25

QLP25
A61P

A61P
AJ72

AJ72

R3 station R3 station
I/O module
I/O module

I/O module

I/O module

I/O module

I/O module

No change
A Series
A Series

A Series

A Series

A Series

A Series
QLP25
QLP25
A61P

A61P

AJ72
AJ72

90
4.4 Gradual replacement of MELSECNET/10 Remote I/O Net

* Replace master station and R3


with Q Series (This completes
* Replace R2 station with Q Series replacement of all stations with
(Master station, R3 not replaced) Q Series)
Transitional step 2 Transition completed

Master station
Master station
I/O module

I/O module

I/O module

I/O module

I/O module
No change Replace

LP21-25
A61P

LP21

DHCPU
AJ71

Q Series

Q Series
CPU
A3U

A Series

A Series

A Series

Q06U
Q61P

QJ71
MELSECNET/10 remote I/O network (optical) MELSECNET/10 remote I/O network (optical)

R1 station R1 station

I/O module

I/O module

I/O module
I/O module

I/O module

I/O module

Replaced in Replaced in LP25-25


LP25-25

Q Series

Q Series

Q Series
Q Series

Q Series

Q Series

Q61P
Q61P

QJ72
QJ72

step 1 step 1

Set Mode to 8 Change Mode


from 8 to “0”

R2 station R2 station
I/O module

I/O module

I/O module
I/O module

I/O module

I/O module

LP25-25
LP25-25

Replaced in
Q Series

Q Series

Q Series
Q Series

Q Series

Q Series

Q61P
Q61P

QJ72
QJ72

Replace Step 2

Set Mode to 8 Change Mode


from 8 to “0”

R3 station R3 station
I/O module

I/O module

I/O module
LP25-25
Q Series

Q Series

Q Series
I/O module

I/O module

I/O module

Q61P

QJ72

No change Replace
A Series

A Series

A Series
QLP25
A61P

AJ72

Set Mode to 0

91
4.5 Replace MELSECNET/MINI(-S3) with CC-Link

4.5 Replace MELSECNET/MINI(-S3) with CC-Link


4.5.1 Replace A2CCPU with Q Series CPU and CC-Link (using A2C shape CC-Link I/O modules)

Solution and Benefit


• A2C shape CC-Link remote I/O modules have been developed to replace MELSECNET/MINI(-S3)
systems with CC-Link. Wiring time is reduced because existing terminal blocks can be mounted
directly on the A2C shape CC-Link remote I/O module by merely changing the communication
and power lines.
• Since the mounting size is the same as that of A2C I/O modules, the new modules can be
mounted using existing holes.

The following is an example of replacing an A2CCPU with a Q Series CPU and A2C I/O modules with A2C
shape CC-Link remote I/O modules.

● Instructions
(1) Replace the A2CCPU with the building block type Q Series CPU and I/O modules with the A2C shape
CC-Link remote I/O modules while maintaining the distributed I/O system.
(2) Utilizing modules sold for upgrading reduces the external wiring man-hours.
(3) Change the communication cables with CC-Link dedicated cables, and rewire the power cables.

A. System configuration example


X40 to 4F
Current configuration X00 to 1F Y20 to 3F Y50 to 5F
AX40
AX41C AY13C Y10C
A2CCPU

X60 to 6F
XA0 to BF Y80 to 9F Y70 to 7F
AX40
AX41C AY13C Y10C

After replacement
Replace
Q00UCPU

QJ61BT11N*1

Empty

Empty
Q61P

*1: Because the master module occupies 32 points, program modifications are needed.
(Device numbers set for auto refresh in the network parameter setting)
Q33B

AJ65DBTB1-32D AJ65DBTB1-32D AJ65DBTB1-32DR

AJ65DBTB1-32R AJ65DBTB1-32R AJ65DBTB1-32DR

B. Module selection example


Product name Existing module Replacement module
Power supply module N/A - Q61P 1
CPU module A2CCPU 1 Q00UCPU 1
Main base unit N/A - Q33B 1
Master module N/A - QJ61BT11N 1
Input module AX41C 2 AJ65DBTB1-32D 2
Output module AY13C 2 AJ65DBTB1-32R 2
I/O combined module AX40Y10C 2 AJ65DBTB1-32DR 2

92
4.5 Replace MELSECNET/MINI(-S3) with CC-Link

A2C shape CC-Link remote I/O modules


CC-Link remote I/O modules are available in the same shape and size as some of the A2C I/O modules to
facilitate transition.
New mounting holes are unnecessary and existing wiring can be utilized with minor modifications.

After replacing the module,


mount the wired terminal block.*1

Remove the wired


terminal block
from the existing
I/O module.

*1: The communication lines and power lines need to be rewired.

(1) Model list


Alternative model
Model to be discontinued
Model Outline
AX41C Terminal block type, 24 V DC input, 32 points,
AJ65DBTB1-32D
AX81C sink/source
Terminal block type, 0.5 A transistor output,
AY51C AJ65DBTB1-32T1
32 points, sink
Terminal block type, 24 V DC input, 16 points,
AX40Y50C AJ65DBTB1-32DT1
0.5 A transistor output, 16 points, I/O composite module

AY13C AJ65DBTB1-32R Terminal block type, relay output, 32 points

AX40Y10C Terminal block type, 24 V DC input, sink/source shared,


AJ65DBTB1-32DR
AX80Y10C 16 points, relay output, 16 points, composite module

Tip
• The A2C shape CC-Link remote I/O modules can also replace MELSECNET/MINI(-S3) systems consisting
of the AJ71PT32(-S3)/A1SJ71PT32(-S3) building block type master module with CC-Link.
In this case, program modification is not required.
• For replacing compact type remote I/O modules with CC-Link modules, refer to “Section 2.6.3 Replace
MELSECNET/MINI compact type remote I/O modules with CC-Link”.

93
4.5 Replace MELSECNET/MINI(-S3) with CC-Link

4.5.2 Replace MELSECNET/MINI(-S3) with CC-Link (using wiring conversion adapter)


Solution and Benefit
By selecting modules with equivalent specifications, existing external wiring can be utilized when
replacing MELSECNET/MINI(-S3) systems with CC-Link.

The following is an example of replacing a MELSECNET/MINI(-S3) system with CC-Link using a wiring
conversion adapter.

● Instructions
(1) Remove the terminal blocks from existing MELSECNET/MINI(-S3) I/O modules, install them in the wiring
conversion adapters, and then mount them on the selected CC-Link remote I/O modules.
(2) Change the MELSECNET/MINI communication cables with CC-Link dedicated cables, and rewire
the power cables.
A. System configuration example
Current configuration
A2SHCPU
A1S61PN

A1SJ71PT32-S3

A1SX42

A1SX42

A1SY42

A1SY41

AJ35TB1-16D AJ35TB2-16D AJ35TB1-16T


(16 points) (16 points) (16 points)
Terminal block Terminal block Terminal block
A1S35B
To power To power To power
MELSECNET/MINI supply, supply, supply,
(Twisted pair cable) To I/O To I/O To I/O

CC-Link I/O module

Replace
Wiring conversion
adapter

After replacement
A2SHCPU
A1S61PN

Existing
A1SJ61BT11

A1SX42

A1SX42

A1SY42

A1SY41

MELSECNET/MINI
terminal block

*1
A1S35B
Replace the link
module AJ65BTB1-16D AJ65BTB2-16D AJ65BTB1-16T
CC-Link dedicated cable (16 points) (16 points) (16 points)

A6ADP-1MC16D A6ADP-2MC16D A6ADP-1MC16T


Terminal block Terminal block Terminal block
To power To power To power
supply, supply, supply,
To I/O To I/O To I/O

*1
*1: Terminating resistor
94
4.5 Replace MELSECNET/MINI(-S3) with CC-Link

B. Module selection example

Product name Existing module Replacement module


MELSECNET/MINI(-S3) master module A1SJ71PT32-S3 1 N/A -
CC-Link master module N/A - A1SJ61BT11 1
AJ35TB1-16D 1 AJ65BTB1-16D 1
Remote input module
AJ35TB2-16D 1 AJ65BTB2-16D 1
Remote output module AJ35TB1-16T 1 AJ65BTB1-16T 1
N/A - A6ADP-1MC16D (for AJ65BTB1-16D) 1
Wiring conversion adapter (newly added) N/A - A6ADP-2MC16D (for AJ65BTB2-16D) 1
N/A - A6ADP-1MC16T (for AJ65BTB1-16T) 1

C. Model list

Model to be discontinued Alternative model


Product Model
Model Remarks (restrictions)
name Alternative module Conversion adapter

AJ35TB1-16D AJ65BTB1-16D 26-pin conversion adapter*1


A6ADP-1MC16D *1: The overall size is increased
Input due to addition of the adapter
module to the alternative module.
AJ35TB2-16D AJ65BTB2-16D 34-pin conversion adapter*1
A6ADP-2MC16D *2: Additional wiring to CTL+
(External power supply
Output 26-pin conversion adapter*1, *2 for output) is required.
AJ35TB1-16T AJ65BTB1-16T
module A6ADP-1MC16T

Tip
• MELSECNET/MINI occupies 8 points/station whereas CC-Link occupies 32 points/station. Therefore, except
for modules with a total of 32 points (occupying 4 stations), I/O numbers need to be changed and program
modifications are required.
• The communication cables must be changed to the CC-Link dedicated cables.
• Specifications differ depending on the alternative model. Refer to “Transition from MELSECNET/MINI-S3,
A2C (I/O) to CC-Link Handbook” L(NA)08061ENG for details.
190˚
• Due to the wiring conversion adapter, the external dimensions
Increased depth
increased by 5.1 mm (height) and 28.5 mm (depth).
Depth of sticking
28.5

out part
(terminal block)

Depth of CC-Link
I/O module
46

Increased height
Mounting face
5.1 65

Unit: mm

95
4.5 Replace MELSECNET/MINI(-S3) with CC-Link

4.5.3 Replace MELSECNET/MINI(-S3) remote I/O station (building block type: AJ72PT35) with
MELSECNET/H using the existing external wiring

Solution and Benefit


• MELSECNET/H (remote I/O network) can utilize Q Series large type base unit. Wiring time can be
reduced by utilizing the external wiring of MELSECNET/MINI remote I/O station, which consists of
existing building block type I/O modules.
• Program modification is not required because the number of occupied points are the same for
each I/O module to be replaced. Therefore, programming time and debugging time after the
replacement is reduced.

● Instructions
(1) Replace the existing MELSECNET/MINI(-S3) with MELSECNET/H (remote I/O network).
Install new network cables: optical cable (loop) or coaxial cable (bus).
(Optical cables are used for the following example.)
(2) When the I/O module of the existing MELSECNET/MINI(-S3) remote I/O station is of terminal block type,
utilize the existing terminal block with the external wiring through a Q Series large type base unit and the
following products.
• Q Series large type I/O modules
• Q Series I/O modules + upgrade tool manufactured by Mitsubishi Electric Engineering Co., Ltd.
(3) In MELSECNET/H (remote I/O network) network parameter, set the master station side devices to be the
same as the ones assigned to the existing MELSECNET/MINI in order to avoid program modification.

A. System configuration example

Current configuration After replacement

A35B MELSECNET/MINI master station Q35B Remote I/O network master station
AJ71PT32-S3

I/O module

I/O module

I/O module

I/O module
QJ71LP21
Q02U
CPU
I/O module

I/O module

I/O module

I/O module
A2ACPU

Q61P

-25
A61P

MELSECNET/H remote
MELSECNET/MINI I/O network (optical loop)
data link system
Remote I/O station: Station number 1
A35B Station number:1 Number of occupied points: 16 Q35BL QG69L

QX41 QY41
QJ72LP25

Replace
ERTN-AQTX

ERTN-AQTY
AJ72PT35

Q61P

QY13L
Empty

QX11L

Empty
-25
A61P

AX41
AX11

AY13

AY41

41

41

Existing Existing Existing Existing


terminal terminal terminal terminal
Station number:17 Number of occupied points: 16 block block block block
A32B
Remote I/O station: Station number 2
Q33B
AJ72PT35

QJ72LP25
A61P

AX42

AY42

Empty
QX42
Q61P

QY42
-25

Existing Existing
connector connector

96
4.5 Replace MELSECNET/MINI(-S3) with CC-Link

B. Network parameter setting example


The following example shows the network parameter settings of MELSECNET/H (remote I/O network) after
replacement in the case where the transmission devices of the existing MELSECNET/MINI(-S3) network were
X/Y100 to 1FF.

(1) Existing MELSECNET/MINI(-S3) (2) MELSECNET/H after replacement


Auto refresh parameter Network parameter (common parameter)

(Network range assignment)

C. Module selection example


(1) Master station
Product name Existing module Replacement module
Power supply module A61P 1 Q61P 1
CPU module A2ACPU 1 Q02UCPU 1
Main base unit A35B 1 Q35B 1
AJ71PT32-S3 QJ71LP21-25
Master module 1 1
*For MELSECNET/MINI(-S3) *For MELSECNET/H remote I/O network

(2) Remote I/O station: Station number 1


Product name Existing module Replacement module
Power supply module A61P 1 Q61P 1
Main base unit A35B 1 Q35BL 1
AJ72PT35 QJ72LP25-25
Data link/Network module 1 1
*For MELSECNET/MINI(-S3) *For MELSECNET/H remote I/O network
AX11 1 QX11L 1
QX41 1
Input module
AX41 1 ERTN-AQTX41 1
QG69L 1
AY13 1 QY13L 1
QY41 1
Output module
AY41 1 ERTN-AQTY41 1
QG69L 1

97
4.5 Replace MELSECNET/MINI(-S3) with CC-Link

(3) Remote I/O station: Station number 2

Product name Existing module Replacement module


Power supply module A61P 1 Q61P 1
Main base unit A32B 1 Q33B 1
AJ72PT35 QJ72LP25-25
Data link/Network module 1 1
*For MELSECNET/MINI(-S3) *For MELSECNET/H remote I/O network
Input module AX42 1 QX42 1
Output module AY42 1 QY42 1

Tip
• The installation of MELSECNET/MINI twisted pair cables needs to be modified according to the upgraded
network.
In the example, optical dual loop is selected to loop the network. When the distance between stations or
overall distance is short, a coaxial bus cable can be used to reduce cable installation time.
• Some CPUs, such as Basic Model QCPUs (Q00J, Q00, Q01CPU), cannot be set as MELSECNET/H
(remote I/O network) master station.
For selecting CPU type, refer to "Q corresponding MELSECNET/H Network System Reference Manual
(Remote I/O network)" SH-080124.
• If modules other than building type I/O modules, such as A2C I/O modules, are mixed in the existing
MELSECNET/MINI(-S3) system, the entire system cannot be upgraded to MELSECNET/H (remote I/O
network).
In this case, consider separating the system into MELSECNET/H (remote I/O network) and CC-Link.
(Replacement by dividing a network)

98
MEMO

99
4.6 Replace MELSEC-I/OLINK with CC-Link/LT, AnyWire DB A20

4.6 Replace MELSEC-I/OLINK with CC-Link/LT, AnyWire DB A20


Solution and Benefit
Replace the MELSEC-I/OLINK remote I/O station to the CC-Link/LT or AnyWire DB A20 to upgrade
the remote I/O system.

A. Replacement configuration example


AJ51T64 Twisted pair cable and cab
tyre cable
A1SJ51T64 Up to 16 stations can
be connected

AJ55TB-4 AJ55TB-8 AJ55TB-16

Replacement to CC-Link/LT Replacement to AnyWire DB A20

CC-Link/LT master module AnyWire DB A20 master module


QJ51AW12D2

●QJ61CL12

Terminating resistor
Power adapter

Remote I/O module for


General-purpose power AnyWire DB A20 (input) *
24 V DC Terminating resistor Remote I/O module for
AnyWire DB A20 (output) *
AnyWire DB
A20
Partner product Remote module

Terminator for AnyWire DB A20 *

Y0
* AnyWire Corporation product

100
4.6 Replace MELSEC-I/OLINK with CC-Link/LT, AnyWire DB A20

B. Comparison of replacement from MELSEC-I/OLINK to AnyWire DB A20 or CC-Link/LT


A comparison of the main functions when replacing MELSEC-I/OLINK to AnyWire DB A20 or CC-Link/LT is
shown below.
‹: Compatible, ✕: Not compatible

Replacement to AnyWire DB A20 Replacement to CC-Link/LT


Item (MELSEC-Q Series compatible) (MELSEC-Q Series/L Series compatible)
Compatibility Details Compatibility Details
Existing I/OLINK external power supply can
External power supply ‹ ✕ Power adapter must be installed
be used
Connection method ‹ T-shape branch, tree branch ‹ T-shape branch
Connection cable ‹ Existing I/OLINK cable can be used ✕ Cable must be newly laid
4-point, 8-point, 16-point 2-point, 4-point, 8-point
I/O module type ‹ ‹
Input module, output module, I/O module Input module, output module, I/O module
Master module’s XY address becomes I/O
Master module 32-points occupied
module’s XY address
Programming ✕ I/O module address is device designated by ‹
Address does not need to be changed (within
FROM/TO instruction
64 points)

Tip
• The I/O module specifications differ when replacing MELSEC-I/OLINK with AnyWire DB A20 or CC-Link/LT.
Refer to the following guide and select the replacement I/O module.
Transition from MELSEC-I/OLINK to AnyWire DB A20
“Transition from MELSEC-I/OLINK to AnyWire DB A20 Handbook: L (NA) 08063”
Transition from MELSEC-I/OLINK to CC-Link/LT
“Transition from MELSEC-I/OLINK to CC-Link/LT Handbook: L (NA)08062”
• If the I/O module specifications, etc., make it difficult to replace the MELSEC-I/OLINK with AnyWire DB A20
or CC-Link/LT, consider replacing with “CC-Link”.
• AnyWire products are not available in some countries. For details, please consult your local Mitsubishi
representative.

101
5.1 Replace high-speed counter modules (AD61(S1)) with Q Series modules

5. Replacing with replacement dedicated modules


5.1 Replace high-speed counter modules (AD61(S1)) with Q Series modules

Solution and Benefit


Q Series replacement dedicated modules share the same input filtering system as, and therefore
can replace the A Series high-speed counter module AD61 or AD61S1 without restrictions from the
specifications of existing pulse generators (e.g. an encoder).

● Instructions
Replace A (Large Type) high-speed counter modules with the following Q Series modules (replacement
dedicated module).
• AD61 -> QD62-H01
• AD61S1 -> QD62-H02

A. System configuration example


Current configuration
Power supply

I/O signals
CPU module
I/O module

I/O module

I/O module
AD61S1

Buffer memory read/write


module
ACPU

ACPU
AD61

Counting range
AD61(S1) 24-bit unsigned binary
Pulse
Pulse generator (0 to 16,777,215)

Encoder Counting speed


(50/10/7 KPPS)
External control signal CH1 Coincidence signal output (1 point)
Controller
[Preset]

Pulse
Pulse generator

Encoder Counting speed


(50/10/7 KPPS) CH2 Coincidence signal output (1 point)
External control signal
Controller
[Preset]

Replace Same input


filtering system

After replacement

I/O signals
QCPU
Power supply

CPU module
I/O module

I/O module

I/O module
QD62

QD62
-H01

-H02

Buffer memory read/write


module

QCPU (Q Mode)

QD62 Counting range


Pulse -H01/02 32-bit signed binary
Pulse generator (-2,147,483,648 to 2,147,483,647)
Encoder Counting speed
(50/10/7 KPPS)
Connector/terminal block

External control signal CH1 Coincidence signal output (2 points)


Controller
Preset
converter module

Counter function
Cable

selection
Pulse
Pulse generator

Encoder Counting speed


(50/10/7 KPPS) CH2 Coincidence signal output (2 points)
External control signal
Controller
Preset
Counter function
selection

102
5.1 Replace high-speed counter modules (AD61(S1)) with Q Series modules

B. Module wiring
The external wiring method is different between AD61/AD61S1 and QD62-H01/QD62-H02.
• AD61, AD61S1: Use a terminal block
• QD62-H01, QD62-H02: Use a connector

The following are replacement methods in which existing wiring are preserved.
(1) Replacement using a conversion adapter manufactured by Mitsubishi Electric Engineering Co., Ltd.
The existing modules' terminal blocks and wiring can be utilized. For replacement details, refer to the
following section.
• Section 2.2 Upgrade to Q Series using Q Series large type base unit and I/O modules

103
5.1 Replace high-speed counter modules (AD61(S1)) with Q Series modules

(2) Replacement using a connector/terminal block converter module


This replacement method is suitable when the Q Series large type base unit and conversion adapter
manufactured by Mitsubishi Electric Engineering Co., Ltd. cannot be used due to system configuration and
installation location restrictions.
Connect the input/output wires, which include solderless terminals, from the existing module to the
connector/terminal block converter module using a dedicated cable. This connection is not restricted by
differences in wiring size.
The following shows the wiring configuration when using a connector/terminal block converter module.

Connector Terminal
Signal name terminal block side
number terminal number
Phase A pulse input 24 V A20 10
Phase A pulse input 12 V B20 0

QD62-H01
Phase A pulse input 5 V A19 11
øA
øB
DEC. ABCOM B19 1
FUNC. FUSE

Phase B pulse input 24 V A18 12


CH1 CH2

Phase B pulse input 12 V B18 2


Phase B pulse input 5 V A17 13
Preset input 24 V B17 3
CH1 Preset input 12 V A16 14
Preset input 5 V B16 4
CTRLCOM A15 15
Function start input 24 V B15 5
Function start input 12 V A14 16
QD62-H01 Function start input 5 V B14 6
EQU 1
(Coincidence output point No.1) A06 1E
Cable
AC05TB EQU 2
AC10TB
(Coincidence output point No.2) B06 E
AC20TB
AC30TB
AC50TB
Phase A pulse input 24 V A13 17
AC80TB Phase A pulse input 12 V B13 7
Connector/terminal block
AC100TB
converter module
Phase A pulse input 5 V A12 18
A6TBXY36
ABCOM B12 8
Phase B pulse input 24 V A11 19
Phase B pulse input 12 V B11 9
Phase B pulse input 5 V A10 1A
Preset input 24 V B10 A
Preset input 12 V A09 1B
CH2
Preset input 5 V B09 B
CTRLCOM A08 1C
Function start input 24 V B08 C
Function start input 12 V A07 1D
Function start input 5 V B07 D
EQU 1
(Coincidence output point No.1) A05 1F

EQU 2
(Coincidence output point No.2) B05 F

B02
12/24 V B01 24 V

A02
0V A01 0V

104
5.1 Replace high-speed counter modules (AD61(S1)) with Q Series modules

Tip
• The input filtering system and counting speed of replacement Q Series dedicated modules QD62-H01 and
QD62-H02 are the same as those of existing A (Large Type) high-speed counter modules AD61 and
AD61S1.
High-speed counter modules can be replaced without being restrained by the specifications of existing pulse
generators (e.g. an encoder).
• AD61/AD61S1 and QD62-H01/QD62-H02 have different counting ranges.
Modify the program in order to use the same counting range as that of the module before replacement.
• AD61, AD61S1: 0 to 16,777,215 (24-bit unsigned binary)
• QD62-H01, QD62-H02: -2,147,483,648 to 2,147,483,647 (32-bit signed binary)
• The number of points occupied by the module changes from 32 to16 points, and thus the I/O signal
assignment (X/Y) also changes. Due to additional functions, the buffer memory addresses are changed and
program modification is necessary. Check the specification at "High-Speed Counter Module User's Manual":
SH-080036, and modify the program.

105
5.1 Replace high-speed counter modules (AD61(S1)) with Q Series modules

C. Comparison of specification between AD61 and QD62-H01 ○: Compatible, △: Partial change required
Item AD61 QD62-H01 Compatibility Precautions for replacement

32 points 16 points
Occupied I/O points △ *1
(I/O assignment: special 32 points) (I/O assignment: Intelligent 16 points)

Number of channels 2 channel ○

Counting speed Set “2” at the intelligent function


- 50 KPPS ○
switch settings module switch setting.

Phase 1-phase input, 2-phase input ○


Count
input Signal level 5 V DC
signal 12 V DC 2 to 5 mA ○
(φA, φB)
24 V DC
Counting 1-phase input 50 KPPS 1-phase input 50 KPPS
speed ○ *2
(Max.) 2-phase input 50 KPPS 2-phase input 50 KPPS
On QD62-H01, as the value is used
Counting 24-bit unsigned binary 32-bit signed binary values
△ with 32-bit signed binary values,
range (0 to 16,777,215) (-2,147,483,648 to 2,147,483,647)
change of sequence program is required.
Perfomance specifications of 1 channels

Counter Type UP/DOWN preset counter + ring counter function ○

Minimum 20 μs
count pulse
width
(set input rise ○
time to 5 μs or
less. Duty ratio: 10 μs 10 μs
50%) (1, 2-phase input)

Magnitude Comparison
range 24-bit unsigned binary 32-bit signed binary values ○
comparison
between
CPU and Set value < count value
Comparison
AD61/ Set value = count value ○
QD62-H01 result
Set value > count value

12/24 V DC 3/6 mA
Preset 5/12/24 V DC 2 to 5 mA
5 V DC 5 mA
On QD62-H01, as the external
External 12/24 V DC 3/6 mA
Count disable - △ input specifications differ, confirm
input 5 V DC 5 mA
the external devices specifications.

Function start - 5/12/24 V DC 2 to 5 mA

Transistor Transistor (shinking type) output


External Coincidence (open collector) output 2 points/channel ○
output output 12/24 V DC 0.5 A 12/24 V DC 0.5 A/1 point 2 A/1 common
Internal current consumption
(5 V DC) 0.3 A 0.3 A ○

Weight 0.5 kg 0.11 kg ○

*1: A program used before replacement can be utilized by setting the start I/O signal numbers of the modules mounted to the right
of the QD62-H01 so that they can be the same as that of the module before replacement.
(Set the start number at "Start XY" of the I/O assignment tab. The number of occupied points of the QD62-H01 cannot be changed.)
*2: The rise/fall time of a pulse affects the counting speed. Countable counting speeds are as follows.
Counting a pulse greater than t = 50 μs may result in a miscount.
• For the AD61 and QD62-H01 (common for 1-phase input and 2-phase input)

t = 5 μs:50 KPPS
t = 50 μs:5 KPPS

t t

106
5.1 Replace high-speed counter modules (AD61(S1)) with Q Series modules

D. Comparison of specification between AD61S1 and QD62-H02 ○: Compatible, △: Partial change required
Item AD61S1 QD62-H02 Compatibility Precautions for replacement

32 points 16 points
Occupied I/O points △ *1
(I/O assignment: special 32 points) (I/O assignment: Intelligent 16 points)

Number of channels 2 channel ○

Counting speed Set “2” at the intelligent function


- 10 KPPS ○
switch settings module switch setting.

Phase 1-phase input, 2-phase input ○


Count
input Signal level 5 V DC
signal 12 V DC 2 to 5 mA ○
(φA, φB)
24 V DC
Counting 1-phase input 10 KPPS 1-phase input 10 KPPS
speed ○ *2
(Max.) 2-phase input 7 KPPS 2-phase input 7 KPPS
On QD62-H02, as the value is used
Counting 24-bit unsigned binary 32-bit signed binary values
△ with 32-bit signed binary values,
range (0 to 16,777,215) (-2,147,483,648 to 2,147,483,647)
change of sequence program is required.
Perfomance specifications of 1 channels

Counter Type UP/DOWN preset counter + ring counter function ○

Minimum 100 μs 142 μs


count pulse
width
(set input rise ○
time to 5 μs or
less. Duty ratio: 50 μs 50 μs 71 μs 71 μs
50%) (1-phase input) (2-phase input)

Magnitude Comparison
range 24-bit unsigned binary 32-bit signed binary values ○
comparison
between
CPU and Set value < count value
Comparison
AD61S1/ Set value = count value ○
QD62-H02 result
Set value > count value

12/24 V DC 3/6 mA
Preset 5/12/24 V DC 2 to 5 mA
5 V DC 5 mA
On QD62-H02, as the external
External 12/24 V DC 3/6 mA
Count disable - △ input specifications differ, confirm
input 5 V DC 5 mA
the external devices specifications.

Function start - 5/12/24 V DC 2 to 5 mA

Transistor Transistor (shinking type) output


External Coincidence (open collector) output 2 points/channel ○
output output 12/24 V DC 0.5 A 12/24 V DC 0.5 A/1 point 2 A/1 common
Internal current consumption
(5 V DC) 0.3 A 0.3 A ○

Weight 0.5 kg 0.11 kg ○

*1: A program used before replacement can be utilized by setting the start I/O signal numbers of the modules mounted to the right
of the QD62-H02 so that they can be the same with that of the module before replacement.
(Set the start number at "Start XY" of the I/O assignment tab. The number of occupied points of the QD62-H02 cannot be changed.)
*2: The rise/fall time of a pulse affects the counting speed. Countable counting speeds are as follows.
Counting a pulse whose rise/fall time is long may result in a miscount.
• For the AD61S1 and QD62-H02

Rise/fall time 1-phase input 2-phase input


t = 5 μs 10 KPPS 7 KPPS
t = 500 μs 500 PPS 250 PPS
t t

107
5.2 Replace DC input modules with 6 mA rated input current (QX41-S2, QX81-S2)

5.2 Replace DC input modules with 6 mA rated input current (QX41-S2, QX81-S2)

Solution and Benefit


• When replacing with the existing A Series module, the rated input current of the DC input module
becomes smaller.
In some cases, the previous Q Series DC input modules were not able to detect input signals from
the external devices due to current insufficiency.
Such issue can be solved by using DC input modules with 6 mA rated input current (QX41-S2 and
QX81-S2).
• The pin arrangement is identical to the existing Q Series DC input module (connector type). The
existing external wiring can be utilized to reduce replacement time.

A. Image of internal circuit when replacing existing A Series DC input module


The following figures use AX41 and AX42 as an example of how to replace the existing A Series DC input
modules (AX41, AX42, AX81, AX82, A1SX41 and A1SX81). The internal circuits show the rated input currents
and provide countermeasures for current insufficiency.
* AX41 and AX42 have different common wiring, but the rated input current specifications and the
countermeasure of installing an external resistor are the same.

Rated input current


Rated input current
AX41: 10 mA
QX41: Approx. 4 mA
AX42: 7 mA

Proximity sensors AX41·AX42 Proximity sensors QX41


Main circuit

Main circuit

Replace with
QX41

24 V DC 24 V DC

Measure to correct the rated


Replace with input current insufficiency
QX41-S2

Rated input current


Rated input current adjusted in accordance
QX41-S2: Approx. 6 mA with the connected device

Proximity sensors QX41-S2 Proximity sensors QX41


Main circuit

Main circuit

24 V DC 24 V DC
External resistor not required
外付け抵抗不要 External 外付け抵抗
resistor required (for input current adjustment)
(入力電流調整用)

108
5.2 Replace DC input modules with 6 mA rated input current (QX41-S2, QX81-S2)

B. Specification comparison
(1) Specification comparison of QX41-S2 input module (positive common (sink) type)
Q Series A (Large Type) Series A (Small Type) Series
Item
QX41-S2 QX41 AX41 AX42 A1SX41
Number of input points 32 32 32 64 32
Rated input voltage 20.4 to 28.8 V DC 10.2 to 26.4 V DC 10.2 to 26.4 V DC
Rated input 24 V DC Approx. 6 mA Approx. 4 mA Approx. 10 mA Approx. 7 mA Approx. 7 mA
current 12 V DC (N/A) (N/A) Approx. 4 mA Approx. 3 mA Approx. 3 mA
Input resistance Approx. 3.6 kΩ Approx. 5.6 kΩ Approx. 2.4 kΩ Approx. 3.4 kΩ Approx. 3.3 kΩ
Common terminal
arrangement 32 points / common 8 points / common 32 points / common 32 points / common

40 pin connector 38-point 40 pin connector 40 pin connector


External connection
terminal block connector
method (With solder) (M3 × 6 screws) (With solder) × 2 (With solder)

(2) Specification comparison of QX81-S2 input module (negative common (source) type)
Q Series A (Large Type) Series A (Small Type) Series
Item
QX81-S2 QX81 AX81 AX82 A1SX81
Number of input points 32 32 32 64 32
Rated input voltage 20.4 to 28.8 V DC 10.2 to 26.4 V DC 10.2 to 26.4 V DC
Rated input 24 V DC Approx. 6 mA Approx. 4 mA Approx. 10 mA Approx. 7 mA Approx. 7 mA
current 12 V DC (N/A) (N/A) Approx. 4 mA Approx. 3 mA Approx. 3 mA
Input resistance Approx. 3.6 kΩ Approx. 5.6 kΩ Approx. 2.4 kΩ Approx. 3.4 kΩ Approx. 3.3 kΩ
Common terminal
arrangement 32 points / common 8 points / common 32 points / common 32 points / common

38-point
External connection 37 pin 37 pin 37 pin
terminal block connector
method D-sub connector (M3 × 6 screws) D-sub connector ×2 D-sub connector

Tip
• The pin arrangement of the A Series connector type DC input module is the same as the Q Series. Since the
current module connector’s wiring can be used, the replacement can be completed just by switching the
modules.
Note that when using negative common (source) type modules, the A Series DC input module and the
connector are reversed. However, connectors of the existing module can be utilized.
• QX41-S2 and QX81-S2 can also be used when Q large type base unit is used in combination with the
upgrade tool manufactured by Mitsubishi Electric Engineering Co.. Ltd. to connect the existing input module
AX41/AX81's terminal block with the external wiring.

109
5.3 Replace analog output positioning module (AD70/A1SD70) with Q Series

5.3 Replace analog output positioning module (AD70/A1SD70) with Q Series

Solution and Benefit


Improve functionality of A Series analog output positioning module AD70, A1SD70 (upward
compatibility)
Use the Q Series module positioning unit to replace without concern of the effect onto the machine
system.

● Instructions
The existing analog output positioning module AD70/A1SD70 is replaced with the Q Series QD73A1.

A. System configuration example


Existing A Large Type Series Existing A Small Type Series Q Series after replacement

A Small
A Large A Small Type Q Q Series
A Large Type Type A1SD70 QD73A1
Type AD70 Series module CPU module
Series module CPU
CPU

CPU module Positioning module AD70, A1SD70, QD73A1 Drive module Servo motor
Command pulse Analog Speed
voltage instruction
Electronic Deflection D/A Servo M
gears counter converter amplifier
Sequence Setting
program data
Interface
Current Multiplier
value
Feedback pulse
*1 *1
PLG
Data read/write
Parameter data *2
Feedback pulse
Positioning data
Zero return parameters
The feedback pulse train from the pulse generator (PLG) can pass
through the drive unit (as shown with *1), or directly output to QD73A1
(as shown with *2). The route depends on the servo motor being used.
Refer to the manual for the servo motor and drive module being used
for information on selecting method *1 or *2.

B. Wiring for external device connection


The existing AD70/A1SD70 external device connection connectors can be used, so there is no need to
change the wiring.
However, the connector orientation will be reversed when replacing the A1SD70.
The existing AD70/A1SD70 required an external 15 V DC ± current power supply, but the QD73A1 does not
need an external power supply.

110
5.3 Replace analog output positioning module (AD70/A1SD70) with Q Series

‹: Compatible, : Partial change required, ✕: Not compatible


Model Precautions for
Item Compatibility
AD70 A1SD70 QD73A1 replacement
No. of control axes 1 axis ‹
Capacity 1 data ‹
Positioning data
Setting method Follows sequence program ‹
Position control mode (positioning, 2-speed trapezoid positioning)
Mode ‹
Speed/position control changeover mode
Position control mode: absolute method/incremental method
Method ‹
Speed/position control changeover mode: incremental method
Position -2147483648 to 2147483647 (pulse)

instruction (with 32-bit sign)
Speed 1 to 400,000 1 to 4,000,000 Specifications are enhanced.

instruction (pulse/s) (pulse/s) (Upward compatibility)
Acceleration/
Automatic trapezoid acceleration/deceleration ‹
deceleration
Positioning
Automatic
Acceleration time: 2 to 9999 ms
acceleration/ ‹
Deceleration time: 2 to 9999 ms
deceleration
In-position Specifications are enhanced.
1 to 2047 pulse 1 to 20479 pulse ‹
range (Upward compatibility)
Backlash
None ‹
compensation
Error
compensation None ‹
function
Speed instruction output 0 to ±10 V DC (setting range: +5 V to ±10 V) ‹
Open collector:
Open collector: 100 kpulse/s 200 kpulse/s
Specifications are enhanced.
Pulse frequency TTL: 100 kpulse/s TTL: 200 kpulse/s ‹
(Upward compatibility)
Positioning Differential output: 100 kpulse/s Differential output:
feedback pulse 1 Mpulse/s
input Connected
Open collector, TTL, differential output ‹
encoder type
Multiplication
Number of feedback pulse inputs can be multiplied to 4, 2, 1 or 1/2 ‹
setting
Setting method changes
from hardware switch to CPU
Zero return control Provided (two types) ‹ module parameters.
The setting method is different,
but the functions are the same.
JOG operation Provided ‹
Absolute method:
1.2 ms*1
Absolute method: 4.4 ms *1
Incremental method: 1.2 ms*1
Incremental method: 4.5 ms *1
JOG operation: 1.2 ms Specifications are enhanced.
Starting time JOG operation: 4.3 ms ‹
Zero return (near-point dog (Upward compatibility)
Zero return (near-point dog type): 4.4 ms
type): 1.2 ms
Zero point return (count type): 5.1 ms
Zero point return (count
type): 1.2 ms
M function None ‹
The 5 V DC internal current
Internal current consumption 5 V DC 0.3 A 5 V DC 0.52 A ✕ consumption must be re-
calculated.
External supply voltage, + 15 V DC 0.2 A External power supply in not
— ‹
current terminal block - 15 V DC 0.02 A required.
48 points 48 points
32 points (No. of I/O slots: 2 slots (No. of I/O slots: 2 slots
(No. of I/O slots: 1 slot occupied) occupied)
Number of occupied I/O points occupied) (I/O assignment: first 16 (I/O assignment: first 16 ‹
(I/O assignment: 32 points points for open slot points for open slot
for special function module) Last 32 points for special Last 32 points for intelligent
function module) function module)
Weight 0.4 kg 0.20 kg

*1: When using the 2-speed trapezoid with AD70/A1SD70, the starting time is 0.2 ms longer. When using the 2-speed trapezoid with QD73A1,
the starting time does not increase.

111
5.3 Replace analog output positioning module (AD70/A1SD70) with Q Series

Tip
• The following points must be observed when making a replacement.

Item AD70 A1SD70 QD73A1 Precautions


No. of occupied slots 1 slot 2 slots *1
48 points 48 points
32 points (I/O assignment: first 16 points (I/O assignment: first 16 points
No. of occupied I/O
(I/O assignment: 32 points for for open slot for open slot *2
points
special function module) Last 32 points for special Last 32 points for intelligent
function module) function module)
• Some address will change.
Buffer memory address *3
• New items have been added with the revised specifications.
Follows CPU module
parameter settings.
Mode setting • Follows hardware switch settings. *4
“I/O assignment” -> “switch
setting”
LED display • LED display items have changed. *5
External wiring • Current connector can be used without modifying wiring. *6
*1: Modules occupying two slots cannot be mounted on the Q Series large base unit.
When selecting a Q Series large base to replace modules currently mounted on the same base, the modules must be split
into two bases by adding an extension base.
*2: If the first half of the slots are set to “open 0 points” when replacing the existing A1SD70, set the parameter I/O assignment
setting as shown below so that the QD73A1 address does not change after replacement.
(1) Set first half slots to “open 0 points”
(2) Set last half slots to same address as existing A1SD70 using the head XY setting
When replacing the existing AD70, set the first half slots to “open 0 points”.
*3: The program must be revised and added. Refer to the QD731A Positioning Module User’s Guide (Details Section).
*4: The mode setting required for positioning changes from hardware switch to parameter I/O assignment switch settings.
Refer to the QD731A Positioning Module User’s Guide (Details Section) and set the switches to the same as the A1SD70.
*5: Each of the LED display items can be confirmed with the QD83A1 I/O signals. If necessary, prepare external lamps, etc., to
correspond to the LED displays, and display the I/O input signal ON/OFF status for each item.
*6: The base dimensions for mounting QD73A1 are different, so the module mounting position will change.
The connector orientation will be reversed when replacing A1SD70.

112
MEMO

113
6.1 Use AnS (Small Type) modules as spare parts for existing A (Large Type) Series modules

6. Replacement utilizing spare part


6.1 Use AnS (Small Type) modules as spare parts for existing A (Large Type) Series
modules
Production of the AnS/QnAS (Small Type) Series and MELSEC-I/OLINK is scheduled to be discontinued on
September 30, 2014. (Last orders accepted until August 31, 2014.)
Notice Please purchase spare parts for your corresponding model before the last order date.
Refer to Technical News “No. FA-A-0142” for details regarding the production discontinuation.

A-A1S module conversion adapter


It allow the use of AnS (Small type) module that A-A1S module conversion adapter with AnS (Small Type)
module is mounted on the base unit when A (Large Type) Series spare parts are not available.

A (Large Type) main/extension base unit,


QA6�B extension base unit

A-A1S module conversion adapter (A1ADP-�)

AnS (Small Type) Series I/O, special function modules, etc.

Model list
Model Outline
A1ADP-XY For mounting I/O modules
A1ADP-SP For mounting special function modules

Notes:
• Up to three adapters per base unit can be used.
• The A-A1S module conversion adapter can also be used with the QA6�B extension base unit, refer to
“Transition from MELSEC-A/QnA (Large Type) Series to Q Series Handbook (Fundamentals) ”
L(NA)08043ENG or “A-A1S Module Conversion Adapter User’s Manual” IB-0800352.
• Specifications differ between the A/QnA and AnS Series modules.
For a comparison of the specifications, refer to “Transition from MELSEC-A/QnA Large Type Series to
AnS/Q2AS Small Type Series Handbook” L(NA)08064ENG.

6.1.1 Use AnS (Small Type) I/O modules as spare parts for A (Large Type) input/output modules

Solution and Benefit


• If the A (Large Type) I/O module malfunctions but replacement is not available, the AnS (Small
Type) I/O module can be installed and used as a spare part, allowing the system to recover
quickly.
• If the A (Large Type) I/O module is not available when the system requires an additional I/O
module, the AnS (Small Type) I/O module can be installed and used as a spare part.

114
6.1 Use AnS (Small Type) modules as spare parts for existing A (Large Type) Series modules

A. System configuration example

Current configuration Module to be replaced

A3ACPU

Empty
A61P

AX41

AX42

AY41

AY41
A35B

Replace
After replacement
A1ADP-XY
A3ACPU

A1SX42

Empty
A61P

AX41

AY41

AY41
+

A-A1S module
conversion adapter
A35B
A1SX42
Connector connection

B. Module selection example


Product name Existing module Replacement module
Power supply module A61P 1 Utilize existing module -
CPU module A3ACPU 1 Utilize existing module -
Main base unit A35B 1 Utilize existing module -
AX41 1 Utilize existing module -
Input module
AX42 1 A1SX42 1
A-A1S module conversion adapter (for A1S) N/A - A1ADP-XY 1
Output module AY41 2 Utilize existing module -

Tip
• Replacement is simple because the A1SX42 (AnS (Small Type) module) has the same connector pin
arrangement as the AX42 (A (Large Type) module). Reconnect the external wire connectors after replacing
the modules.
• Some of the specifications (rated input current etc.) differ between the AX42 and the A1SX42.
Refer to “Transition from MELSEC-A/QnA Large Type Series to AnS/Q2AS Small Type Series Handbook”
L(NA)08064ENG for details.

115
6.1 Use AnS (Small Type) modules as spare parts for existing A (Large Type) Series modules

6.1.2 Use AnS (Small Type) module as spare parts for A (Large Type) computer link module
Solution and Benefit
• If the computer link module malfunctions but A (Large Type) Series spare parts are not available,
the AnS (Small Type) computer link module can be installed on the A1ADP adapter and used as a
replacement, allowing the system to recover quickly.
• If the A (Large Type) computer link module is not available when the system requires an
additional module, the AnS (Small Type) computer link module can be installed on the A1ADP
adapter and used as a spare part.

The following is an example of replacing an A (Large Type) computer link module with AnS (Small Type)
computer link modules using the A-A1S module conversion adapter.

● Instructions
(1) The A (Large Type) computer link modules have two channels (RS232C and RS422), whereas the AnS
Series computer link modules only have one. Therefore, if two channels are used, two modules are
needed.
(2) A program modification is not required if:
• The AnS module set to the No-protocol mode is mounted on the same slot as the existing module.
• The AnS module set to the Dedicated protocol mode is mounted on the empty slot.
(This is because the No-protocol mode requires a transmission program but the Dedicated protocol
mode does not.)

A. System configuration example


(1) Computer link module options
Model Outline
Current configuration Module to be replaced
A1SJ71UC24-R2 RS232C: 1 channel
A1SJ71UC24-R4 RS422/485: 1 channel
2-channel
AJ71UC24
A3ACPU

module
Empty
A61P

AX41

AX41

AY41

A35B

Replace A1ADP-SP A1ADP-SP

After replacement
A-A1S A-A1S
conversion conversion
adapter adapter
A1SJ71UC24-R4

A1SJ71UC24-R4
A1ADP-SP

A1ADP-SP
A3ACPU
A61P

AX41

AX41

AY41
+

A35B 1-channel 1-channel


module module
Channel set to Channel set to
No-protocol Dedicated protocol
mode mode

A1SJ71UC24-R2 or A1SJ71UC24-R2 or
A1SJ71UC24-R4 A1SJ71UC24-R4
set to No-protocol mode set to Dedicated protocol mode
(Mount this module on the same (Mount this module on the empty slot)
slot as the existing module
(AJ71UC24))

116
6.1 Use AnS (Small Type) modules as spare parts for existing A (Large Type) Series modules

B. Module selection example (when two channels are used)


Product name Existing module Replacement module
Power supply module A61P 1 Utilize existing module -
CPU module A3ACPU 1 Utilize existing module -
Main base unit A35B 1 Utilize existing module -
Input module AX41 2 Utilize existing module -
A-A1S module conversion adapter (for A1S) N/A - A1ADP-SP 2
A1SJ71UC24-R2 1
Computer link module AJ71UC24 1
A1SJ71UC24-R4 1
Output module AY41 1 Utilize existing module -

Tip
• The AJ71UC24 and A1SJ71UC24-R2/A1SJ71UC24-R4 have the same buffer memory address and
transmission X/Y address assignment for the No-protocol mode.
Therefore, it is not required to modify the program if the module set to the No-protocol mode is mounted on
the same slot as the existing module.
• The module set to the Dedicated protocol mode does not require a programmable controller program. Also,
the external device connected to this module can communicate regardless of its slot address-changing the
address does not affect communication.
However, when the “On-demand function” is used, it is required to modify the program due to changes in the
designated address for the “TO instruction” and handshake X/Y address.

117
7.1 Replace analog I/O module with Q Series

7. Replacing the Intelligent Module


7.1 Replace analog I/O module with Q Series
Solution and Benefit
The A Small Type Series analog I/O module can be replaced with the Q Series analog I/O module
without increasing the number of modules.

7.1.1 Replace A1S64ADA with Q Series

A. System configuration example


Power supply

A1S63ADA

I/O module

I/O module

I/O module

I/O module
AnSCPU
module

A1S63ADA
CH1
Analog (voltage/current) input A/D conversion Digital value output (to CPU)
CH2
Analog (voltage/current) input A/D conversion Digital value output (to CPU)
CH3
Digital value input (from CPU) D/A conversion Analog (voltage/current) output
QCPU
Power supply

I/O module

I/O module

I/O module
AD2DA
module

Q64

Q64AD2DA
CH1
Analog (voltage/current) input A/D conversion Digital value output (to CPU)
CH2
Analog (voltage/current) input A/D conversion Digital value output (to CPU)
CH3
Analog (voltage/current) input A/D conversion Digital value output (to CPU)
CH4
Analog (voltage/current) input A/D conversion Digital value output (to CPU)
CH5
Digital value input (from CPU) D/A conversion Analog (voltage/current) output
CH6
Digital value input (from CPU) D/A conversion Analog (voltage/current) output

118
7.1 Replace analog I/O module with Q Series

B. Comparison of A1S63ADA and Q64AD2DA specifications

‹: Compatible, : Partial change required, ✕: Not compatible


Model Precautions for
Item Compatibility
A1S63ADA Q64AD2DA replacement
Comparison of A/D conversion performance
No. of analog
2 points (2 channels) 4 points (4 channels) ‹
input points
-10 to 10 V DC -10 to 10 V DC
Analog Voltage ‹
(input resistance 2 KΩ to 1 MΩ) (input resistance value 1 MΩ)
input
Current -20 to 20 mA DC (input resistance 250 Ω) 0 to 20 mA DC (input resistance value 250 Ω) - current cannot be used.
Normal resolution mode:
16-bit signed binary
-96 to 4095, -4096 to 4095, -1096 to 4595
When set to 1/4000 -4096 to +4095
Digital output High-resolution mode:
When set to 1/8000 -8192 to +8191
-384 to 16383, -288 to 12287,
When set to 1/12000 -12288 to +12287
-16384 to 16383, -3288 to 13787

Digital value output Item Normal resolution mode


Analog input
Analog input
Input

1/4000 1/8000 1/12000 Digital value Resolution


range
10 V 4000 8000 12000 0 to 10 V 2.5 mV
5 V or 20 mA 2000 4000 8000 0 to 5 V 0 to 4000 1.25 mV
0 V or 4 mA 0 0 0
Voltage

1 to 5 V 1.0 mV
-5 V or -12 mA -2000 -4000 -8000
I/O characteristics -10 to 10 V -4000 to 4000 2.5 mV
-10 V -4000 -8000 -12000
1 to 5 V The concept of offset
Voltage 2.5 mV 1.25 mV 0.83 mV -1000 to 4500 1.0 mV
(extended mode)
Current 10 μA 5 μA 3.33 μA value and gain value
0 to 20 mA 5 μA
0 to 4000 will change. Refer to the
Current

Where, offset value: 0 V / 4 mA and gain value: 5 V / 4 to 20 mA 4 μA


30 mA (default value) Q64AD2DA User’s Manual
4 to 20 mA
-1000 to 4500 4 μA (Details), and check the
(extended mode)
I/O characteristics.
Item High-resolution mode
Analog input
Input

Digital value Resolution


range
0 to10 V 0 to16000 0.625 mV
0 to 5 V 0.416 mV
0 to12000
Voltage

1 to 5 V 0.333 mV
Maximum -10 to10 V -16000 to16000 0.625 mV
resolution 1 to 5 V
-3000 to13500 0.333 mV
(extended mode)
0 to 20 mA 1.66 μA
0 to12000
Current

4 to 20 mA 1.33 μA
4 to 20 mA
-3000 to13500 1.33 μA
(extended mode)

1/4000 1 ms/Ch
Conversion speed 1/8000 2 ms/Ch 500 μs/channel ‹
1/12000 3 ms/Ch
Normal resolution mode:
0 to 55°C ±0.4% (±16)
± 1% 1/4000: ±40
25±5°C ±0.1% (±4)
General accuracy 1/8000: ±80 ‹
High-resolution mode:
1/12000: ±120
0 to 55°C ±0.4% (voltage ±64, current ±48)
25±5°C ±0.1% (voltage ±16, current ±12)

119
7.1 Replace analog I/O module with Q Series

‹: Compatible, : Partial change required, ✕: Not compatible


Model Precautions for
Item Compatibility
A1S63ADA Q64AD2DA replacement
Comparison of D/A conversion performance
No. of analog
1 point (1 channel) 2 points (2 channels) ‹
output points
-10 to 10 V DC -10 to 10 V DC
Analog Voltage ‹
(external load resistance 2 KΩ to 1 MΩ) (external load resistance value 1 MΩ)
output
Current 0 to 20 mA DC (external load resistance 250 Ω) 0 to 20 mA DC (external load resistance 250 Ω) ‹
16-bit signed binary Normal resolution mode:
When set to 1/4000 -4096 to +4095 -96 to 4095,-4096 to 4095
Digital input
When set to 1/8000 -8192 to +8191 High-resolution mode: 
When set to 1/12000 -12288 to +12287 -384 to 16383, -288 to 12287, -16384 to 16383

Digital value output Item Normal resolution mode


Analog input
Analog input

Input
1/4000 1/8000 1/12000 Digital value Resolution
range
0V 4000 8000 12000
0 to 5 V 1.25 mV
I/O characteristics 5 V or 20 mA 2000 4000 8000 0 to 4000
0 V or 4 mA 0 0 0 Voltage 1 to 5V 1.0 mV
The concept of offset value
-5 V or -12 mA -2000 -4000 -8000 -10 to10V -4000 to 4000 2.5 mV and gain value will change.
-10 V -4000 -8000 -12000
0 to 20mA 5 μA Refer to the Q64AD2DA
Current

Voltage 2.5 mV 1.25 mV 0.83 mV 0 to 4000 User’s Manual (Details), and


Current 5 μA 2.5 μA 1.7μA 4 to 20mA 4 μA
check the I/O characteristics.
Where, offset value: 0 V / 4 mA and gain value: 5 V / Item High-resolution mode
30 mA (default value)
Analog input
Input

Digital value Resolution


range
0 to 5 V 0.416 mV
Maximum 0 to12000
Voltage

resolution 1 to 5 V 0.333 mV
-10 to10 V -16000 to16000 0.625 mV
0 to 20 mA 1.66 μA
Current

0 to12000
4 to 20 mA 1.33 μA

1/4000 1 ms/Ch
Conversion speed 1/8000 2 ms/Ch 500 μs/channel ‹
1/12000 3 ms/Ch
0 to 55°C ±0.3%
Voltage: ±1% (±0.1 V) (voltage ±30 mV, current ±60 μA)
General accuracy ‹
Current: ±1% (±0.2 mA) 25±5°C ±0.1%
(voltage ±10 mV, current ±20 μA)
Output short-
Provided Not provided ✕
circuit protection
Common specifications
Simple loop control Consider measures using
Provided Not provided ✕
(function expression) sequence program.*1
External supply 24 V DC ±15% rush current: 2.5 A External power supply is
Not required
power 150 μs or less current consumption: 0.19 A required.
• Between I/O terminals and programmable
• Between I/O terminals and programmable
controller power: photo coupler isolation
Isolation method controller power: photo coupler isolation ‹
• Between I/O channels: Not isolated
• Between channels: Not isolated
• Between external power supply and analog I/O: Not isolated
External wire 18-point terminal block (enclosed connector
20-point terminal block ✕
connection method used for external power supply)
Compatible wire size 0.75 to 1.5 mm2 0.3 to 0.75 mm2 ✕ Wiring must be changed.
Compatible crimp R1.25-3, 1.25-YS3, 1.25-3, R1.25-3

terminal RAV1.25-3, V1.25-YS3A (Crimp terminals with sleeve cannot be used)
Internal current
0.8 A 0.17 A ‹
consumption
No. of occupied 32 points (I/O assignment: 32 points for 16 points (I/O assignment: 16 points for Number of occupied points
I/O points special module) intelligent module) will vary.
*1: Example of measures using sequence program

Programming Expression of function expression


Analog (voltage/ CH1
(1) y=AX1+BX2+C A, B, C: Constants
X1
current) input A/D conversion CH5
Function y X1: CH1 analog input value
Analog (voltage/ CH2 D/A conversion Analog (voltage/
expression current) output X1 +C
(2) y=A  X2: CH2 analog input value
current) input A/D conversion X2
X2 y: CH5 analog output value

(3) Coordinate designation …


CH1 analog input / CH5 analog output

120
7.1 Replace analog I/O module with Q Series

Tip
• The concept of offset value and gain value differ for the A1S63ADA and the Q64ADS2DA module for
replacement. Thus, the resolution will differ.
Refer to the Q64AD2DA User’s Manual (Details), and check the I/O characteristics.
• The Q64AD2DA module for replacement does not have the simple loop control (function expression)
function.
If the simple loop control (function expression) is used with the A1S63ADA, the sequence program must be
revised.
• The number of points occupied with the module changes from 32 points to the 16 points, and the I/O signal
(X, Y) assignment will change.
The buffer memory address will also change with the functions that have been added.
For this reason, change or revision of the program is required.
Check the detailed specifications in the Q64AD2DA User’s Manual (Details), and change or revise the
program.

121
7.1 Replace analog I/O module with Q Series

7.1.2 Replace analog I/O module A1S66ADA with Q Series

A. System configuration example


Power supply

A1S66ADA

I/O module

I/O module

I/O module

I/O module
AnSCPU
module

QCPU
Power supply

I/O module

I/O module

I/O module
Q64AD
module

2DA
A1S66ADA/Q64AD2DA
CH1
Analog (voltage/current) input A/D conversion Digital value output (to CPU)
CH2
Analog (voltage/current) input A/D conversion Digital value output (to CPU)
CH3
Analog (voltage/current) input A/D conversion Digital value output (to CPU)
CH4
Analog (voltage/current) input A/D conversion Digital value output (to CPU)
CH5
Digital value input (from CPU) D/A conversion Analog (voltage/current) output
CH6
Digital value input (from CPU) D/A conversion Analog (voltage/current) output

122
7.1 Replace analog I/O module with Q Series

B. Comparison of A1S66ADA and Q64AD2DA specifications


‹: Compatible, : Partial change required, ✕: Not compatible
Model Precautions for
Item Compatibility
A1S66ADA Q64AD2DA replacement
Comparison of A/D conversion performance
No. of analog
4 points (4 channels) ‹
output points
-10 to 10 V DC -10 to 10 V DC
Analog Voltage ‹
(input resistance 2 KΩ to 1 MΩ) (input resistance value 1 MΩ)
input
Current 0 to 20 mA DC (input resistance value 250 Ω) ‹
Normal resolution mode:
-96 to 4095, -4096 to 4095, -1096 to 4595
Digital output 0 to 4000 (12-bit binary value) High-resolution mode:
-384 to 16383, -288 to 12287,
-16384 to 16383, -3288 to 13787

Analog input Item Normal resolution mode


Item

Digital value Resolution


range
Analog input
Input

0 to10 V 2.5 mV Digital value Resolution


range
0 to 5 V 1.25 mV
0 to 4000 0 to10 V 2.5 mV
Voltage

1 to 5 V 1.0 mV
0 to 5 V 0 to 4000 1.25 mV
-10 to10 V 5 mV
Voltage

1 to 5 V 1.0 mV
I/O characteristics 1 to 5 V
— — -10 to10 V -4000 to 4000 2.5 mV
(extended mode)
1 to 5 V The concept of offset
0 to 20 mA 5 μA -1000 to 4500 1.0 mV
0 to 4000 (extended mode)
value and gain value
Current

4 to 20 mA 4 μA
0 to 20 mA 5 μA
4 to 20 mA 0 to 4000 will change. Refer to the
Current

— — 4 to 20 mA 4 μA
(extended mode) Q64AD2DA User’s Manual
4 to 20 mA
-1000 to 4500 4 μA (Details), and check the
(extended mode)
I/O characteristics.
Item High-resolution mode
Analog input
Input

Digital value Resolution


range
0 to10 V 0 to 16000 0.625 mV
0 to 5 V 0.416 mV
0 to 12000
Voltage

1 to 5 V 0.333 mV
Maximum -10 to10 V -16000 to 16000 0.625 mV
resolution 1 to 5 V
-3000 to 13500 0.333 mV
(extended mode)
0 to 20 mA 1.66 μA
0 to 12000
Current

4 to 20 mA 1.33 μA
4 to 20 mA
-3000 to 13500 1.33 μA
(extended mode)

400 μs or less/4ch The conversion speed will


Conversion speed 500 μs/channel
(Sampling: 80 μs/1ch) be slower.
Normal resolution mode:
0 to 55°C ±0.4% (±16)
25±5°C ±0.1% (±4)
General accuracy Within ±1% (±40) ‹
High-resolution mode:
0 to 55°C ±0.4% (voltage ±64, current ±48)
25±5°C ±0.1% (voltage ±16, current ±12)

123
7.1 Replace analog I/O module with Q Series

‹: Compatible, : Partial change required, ✕: Not compatible


Model Precautions for
Item Compatibility
A1S66ADA Q64AD2DA replacement
Comparison of D/A conversion performance
No. of analog
2 points (1 channel) 2 points (2 channels) ‹
output points
-10 to 10 V DC -10 to 10 V DC
Analog Voltage ‹
(external load resistance 1 MΩ) (external load resistance value 1 MΩ)
output
Current 0 to 20 mA DC (external load resistance 250 Ω) 0 to 20 mA DC (external load resistance 250 Ω) ‹
Normal resolution mode: -96 to 4095,
-4096 to 4095
Digital input 0 to 4000 (12-bit binary value) High-resolution mode: -384 to 16383,
-288 to 12287,
-16384 to 16383
Input Analog input range Digital value Resolution Item Normal resolution mode
0 to 10 V 2.5 mV
Input
Analog input range Digital value Resolution
0 to 5 V 1.25 mV
0 to 4000 0 to 10 V 2.5 mV
Voltage

1 to 5 V 1.0 mV
0 to 5 V 0 to 4000 1.25 mV
-10 to 10 V 5 mV
Voltage

1 to 5 V 1.0 mV
1 to 5 V
― ― -10 to 10 V -4000 to 4000 2.5 mV
I/O characteristics (extended mode)
1 to 5 V
0 to 20 mA 5 μA -1000 to 4500 1.0 mV
0 to 4000 (extended mode) The concept of offset value
Current

4 to 20 mA 4 μA
0 to 20 mA 5 μA and gain value will change.
4 to 20 mA 0 to 4000
Current

― ― 0 to 20 mA 4 μA Refer to the Q64AD2DA


(extended mode)
4 to 20 mA
-1000 to 4500 4 μA
User’s Manual (Details), and
(extended mode) check the I/O characteristics.
Item High-resolution mode
Input

Analog input range Digital value Resolution


0 to10 V 0 to 16000 0.625 mV
0 to 5 V 0.416 mV
0 to 12000
Voltage

1 to 5 V 0.333 mV
Maximum -10 to10 V -16000 to 16000 0.625 mV
resolution 1 to 5 V
-3000 to 13500 0.333 mV
(extended mode)
0 to 20 mA 1.66 μA
0 to 12000
Current

4 to 20 mA 1.33 μA
4 to 20 mA
-3000 to 13500 1.33 μA
(extended mode)

240 μs or less/2ch
Conversion speed 500 μs/channel ‹
(Sampling: 80 μs/1ch)
0 to 55°C ±0.3%
Voltage: ±1% (±0.1 V) (voltage ±30 mV, current ±60 μA)
General accuracy ‹
Current: ±1% (±0.2 mA) 25±5°C ±0.1%
(voltage ±10 mV, current ±20 μA)
Output short-
Provided Not provided ✕
circuit protection
Common specifications
External supply 24 V DC ±15% rush current: 2.5 A External power supply is
Not required
power 150 μs or less current consumption: 0.19 A required.
• Between I/O terminals and programmable
• Between I/O terminals and programmable controller power: photo coupler isolation
Isolation method controller power: photo coupler isolation • Between I/O channels: Not isolated ‹
• Between channels: Not isolated • Between external power supply and analog
I/O: Not isolated
External wire
18-point terminal block (enclosed connector
connection 20-point terminal block (M3.5 x 7 screws) ✕
used for external power supply)
method
Compatible wire size 0.75 to 1.25 mm2 0.3 to 0.75 mm2 ✕ Wiring must be changed.
R1.25-3, 1.25-YS3, 2-3.5
Compatible crimp 1.25-3, R1.25-3
2-YS3A, V1.25-M3, V1.25-YS3A ✕
terminal (Crimp terminals with sleeve cannot be used)
V2-S3, V2-YS3A
Internal current
0.21 A 0.17 A ‹
consumption
No. of occupied 64 points (64 input points, 64 output points) 16 points (I/O assignment: 16 points for Number of occupied points
I/O points (I/O assignment: 64 output points) intelligent module) will vary.

124
7.1 Replace analog I/O module with Q Series

Tip
• The concept of offset value and gain value differ for the A1S66ADA and the Q64AD2DA module for
replacement. Thus, the resolution will differ.
Refer to the Q64AD2DA User’s Manual (Details), and check the I/O characteristics.
• The number of points occupied with the module changes from 64 points to the 16 points, and the I/O signal
(X, Y) assignment will change.
A1S66ADA is an I/O unit, so the analog I/O values corresponding to the buffer memory are stored as I/O
signal XY, and storage method will differ from the Q64AD2DA.
For this reason, change or revision of the program is required.
Check the detailed specifications in the Q64AD2DA User’s Manual (Details), and change or revise the
program.

125
7.2 Replace position detection unit (A6�LS/A1S62LS) with Q Series

7.2 Replace position detection unit (A6�LS/A1S62LS) with Q Series

Solution and Benefit


The A Series position detection unit (A6�LS/A1S62LS) can be replaced with the VS-Q62
(manufactured by partner NSD Co., Ltd.) without changing the connected absocoder.

Instructions
Replace the current A61LS, A62LS, A62LS-S5, A63LS or A1S62LS type position detection unit with the
VS-Q62 absocoder type position detection unit (manufactured by partner NSD Co., Ltd.).
The VS-Q62 absocoder type position detection unit can be directly mounted on the Q Series programmable
controller base unit.

A. Existing position detection unit, absocoder model and replacement unit type
The existing absocoder can be utilized by selecting the following VS-Q62 according to the current position
detection unit and absocoder model.
Q Series position detection
Existing A Series position detection unit
Absocoder model unit for replacement
VS-Q62 VS-Q62B A61LS A62LS A62LS-S5 A63LS A1S62LS
VRE-P062SAC N/A
VS-Q62B-V1PG
VRE-P028SAC N/A
MRE-32SP062SAC
MRE-GSP062FAC VS-Q62-M2PG VS-Q62B-M2PG
(:64/128/160/256/320)
VLS-256PWB
VLS-512PWB
VLS-1024PW
VS-Q62-L VS-Q62B-L
VLS-512PYB
VLS-1024PYB
VLS-2048PY
VS-Q62 : Varilimit type (scaling, positioning, switch output)
VS-Q62B: Converter type (position detection function)

B. Connection cable
The existing connection cable can be used.
There is no need for new wiring.

C. External setting unit


Select the following VS-Q62 external setting unit.
VS-Q62 VS-Q62B A61LS A62LS A62LS-S5 A63LS A1S62LS
VS-T62 VS-Q62-EDWU ―
Unit standard mounting (external setting unit) ―

126
Part Ⅱ: Programming

127
8.1 Replace instructions with different QCPU instruction format
(excluding AnACPU/AnUCPU dedicated instructions)

8. Precautions for utilizing ACPU programs in QCPU


Pay attention to the following points when executing “Change PLC type” and utilizing the ACPU program with the
QCPU.
• The instruction format will change, so the instructions may be switched to a different type when the PLC type
is changed.
Instructions that use an accumulator (A0, A1) with the ACPU do not describe the device name or device No.
in the instruction format. However, these are described in the instruction format with the QCPU instruction.
• The instruction specifications will differ, so the program must be corrected.
• There are replacement candidate instructions when executing “Change PLC type”, but these will be switched
to “SM1255” as instructions that cannot be replaced because of a difference in specifications.
There are several inquires for explaining the specifications of the replacement instructions and for revising the
program after replacement.
Matters frequently asked questions when utilizing the QCPU program with the QCPU are explained as precautions.

● Peripheral devices using existing A (Large Type) and A0J2 Series CPU program
The following CPU types are not compatible with GX Developer, so the PLC type must be changed to GX
Developer compatible CPU types with the following instructions before the programs can be used.
• CPUs not compatible with GX Developer
AnCPU (including those with link function)
A3HCPU (including those with link function)
A3MCPU (including those with link function)
A0J2CPU (including those with link function)
A52GCPU, A3VCPU, A73CPU
• Operation procedures
1) For A/QnA -> Q conversion support tool “A0J2 conversion support tool” function
1. Start the A/QnA -> Q conversion support tool “A0J2 conversion support tool”.

2. Designate the existing CPU type, and read out the program with “Read from PLC”.

3. Use the PLC type change operation to change PLC type to the GX Developer compatible A Series CPU.

4. Use the GX Developer’s other format read function, and utilize the program with revised PLC type.

5. Use GX Developer, and execute “Change PLC type” to the replaced QCPU type.
* The “A/QnA -> Q conversion support tool” can be downloaded for free from the Mitsubishi Electric FA website.

2) For A6GPP(SW�GP-GPPA)
1. Use A6GPP(SW�GP-GPPA), and read the program from the existing CPU with “Read from PLC”.

2. Change PLC type to the GX Developer compatible A Series CPU on hand.

3. Write the program with revised PLC type into the GX Developer compatible A Series CPU on hand.

4. Use “Read from PLC”, and read the program from ACPU written with GX Developer.

5. Use GX Developer, and execute “Change PLC type” to the replaced QCPU type.

3) For MS-DOS compatible GPPA software (SW�IVD/NX-GPPA)


1. Use the MS-DOS compatible GPPA software, and read the program from the existing CPU with “Read from PLC”.

2. Change PLC type to the GX Developer compatible A Series CPU.

3. Use the GX Developer’s other format read function, and utilize the program with revised PLC type.

4. Use GX Developer, and execute “Change PLC type” to the replaced QCPU type.
128
8.1 Replace instructions with different QCPU instruction format
(excluding AnACPU/AnUCPU dedicated instructions)

8.1 Replace instructions with different QCPU instruction format


(excluding AnACPU/AnUCPU dedicated instructions)
8.1.1 Instructions that use accumulators (A0, A1)

Some QCPU operation processing instructions are different from their corresponding ACPU instructions in
format.
This section explains the instructions that have different specified formats.

Frequently asked questions regarding the conversion of ACPU to QCPU program

(Inquiry example)
1. Instructions with different format from that of ACPU instructions are used when
upgrading to QCPU. Is further program modification necessary?

2. The devices "SD718 and SD719", which were not used in ACPU, are automatically part
of the QCPU instructions after replacement. What are these devices for? Is operation
affected by these devices?

3. "Change PLC type" executes a direct conversion of several ACPU instructions, such as
assignment and saving of operation data, but the instruction format remains similar to
that of ACPU instructions. Is it possible to further simplify the QCPU instructions using a
similar method?

(Answer)
ACPU instructions that use accumulators (A0 and A1) have different formats when
converted to QCPU instructions. These accumulators are replaced by devices SD718 and
SD719.
Therefore, the same operation as in ACPU is executed even if the instruction format is
different and SD718 and SD719 are used.
In addition, a group of multiple instructions, such as instructions to transfer data to the
ACPU accumulators (A0 and A1), can be converted to QCPU instructions and further
modified to simplify the program and reduce the number of steps.

A. Instructions that use accumulators (A0 and A1)


(1) ACPU
Instructions that use accumulators (A0 and A1) can execute operations without explicitly specifying A0 and
A1 as the source and destination device. Also, the operation result is stored in the accumulators A0 and
A1 without specifying the device in which it is stored in.
(2) QCPU
QCPU instructions need to specify a source and destination device.

129
8.1 Replace instructions with different QCPU instruction format
(excluding AnACPU/AnUCPU dedicated instructions)

B. ACPU to QCPU instruction replacement


Replacing ACPU program with QCPU program using “Change PLC type” converts ACPU instructions into
QCPU instructions. Therefore, even if the accumulators A0 and A1 are not explicitly specified in the ACPU
program, the devices SD718 and SD719 will automatically take over the accumulators’ functionalities in the
QCPU program.
However, if A0 and A1 are explicitly described in the ACPU program, the devices SD718 and SD719 will
directly replace the accumulators.
The program converted through “Change PLC type” will execute normally and modifications are not necessary.

C. Changing to QCPU instruction format


The automatically converted programs will execute without problems. However, modifying the instructions into
QCPU format will significantly simplify the program and reduce the number of steps.

D. List of instructions that use accumulators (A0 and A1)

QCPU/QnACPU AnUCPU/AnACPU/AnNCPU
Function
Format of instructions Remarks Format of instructions Remarks
• Rotation data is set
ROR D n • D: Rotation data ROR n
in A0.*1
Right rotation of
• Rotation data is set
16-bit data • D: Rotation data
RCR D n RCR n in A0.*1
• Use SM700 for carry flag • Use M9012 for carry flag.

• Rotation data is set


ROL D n • D: Rotation data ROL n
in A0.*1
Left rotation of
• Rotation data is set
16-bit data • D: Rotation data
RCL D n RCL n in A0.*1
• Use SM700 for carry flag • Use M9012 for carry flag.

• Rotation data is set


DROR D n • D: Rotation data DROR n
in A0, A1.*2
Right rotation of
• Rotation data is set
32-bit data • D: Rotation data
DRCR D n DRCR n in A0, A1.*2
• Use SM700 for carry flag • Use M9012 for carry flag.

• Rotation data is set


DROL D n • D: Rotation data DROL n
in A0, A1.*2
Left rotation of
• D: Rotation data • Rotation data is set
32-bit data
DRCL D n • Use SM700 for carry flag DRCL n in A0, A1.*2
• Use M9012 for carry flag.

16-bit data • Search result is stored • Search result is stored


SER S1 S2 D n SER S1 S2 n
search in D, D +1 device in A0, A1.
32-bit data • Search result is stored • Search result is stored
DSER S1 S2 D n DSER S1 S2 n
search in D, D +1device in A0, A1.
16-bit data • Check result is stored • Check result is stored
SUM S D SUM S
checks in D device in A0.
32-bit data • Check result is stored • Check result is stored
DSUM S D DSUM S
checks in D device in A0.

*1 Rotation result is stored in A0.


*2 Rotation result is stored in A0 and A1.

130
8.1 Replace instructions with different QCPU instruction format
(excluding AnACPU/AnUCPU dedicated instructions)

E. Program replacement example


(1) Right rotation of 16-bit data instruction(ROR)

ACPU program
X0 * (Transfer the rotation data to A0)
0 MOVP D0 A0
Instruction Rotation
execution execution
condition device
* (Execute the rotation)
RORP K3

* (Transfer the rotation result)


MOVP A0 D0
Rotation
execution
device
M9012
M0
Carry flag Check Carry
ON/OFF

16 END

Replacement QCPU program


X0 (Transfer the rotation data)
0 MOVP D0 SD718
Instruction Rotation ACPU [A0]
execution execution converted
condition device to special D
(Execute the rotation)
RORP SD718 K3
ACPU [A0]
converted
to special D
(Transfer the rotation result)
MOVP SD718 D0
ACPU [A0] Rotation
converted execution
to special D device
SM700
M0
Carry flag Check Carry
(ACPU M9012) ON/OFF

51 END

Equivalent QCPU program in instruction format


Execute rotation of and store the result in the specified device.

X0
0 RORP D0 K3
Instruction Rotation
execution execution
condition SM700 device
M0
Carry flag Check Carry
(ACPU M9012) ON/OFF

39 END

131
8.1 Replace instructions with different QCPU instruction format
(excluding AnACPU/AnUCPU dedicated instructions)

(2) Search instruction(SER)

ACPU program
* Execute the search instruction: store the result in the accumulators (A0, A1).

X1
0 SERP D10 D100 K10
Instruction Search data Head device of
execution storage device searched data
condition
* (Search result: transfer location first matched location)
MOVP A0 D0
First matched
location

* (Search result: transfer the number of matched data)


MOVP A1 D1
Number of
matches

20 END

Replacement QCPU program


* Execute the search instruction: store the result in SD718 and SD719, which are replacement for A0 and A1.

X1
0 SERP D10 D100 SD718 K10
Instruction Search data Head device of First matched
execution storage device searched data location found
condition
(Transfer the first matched location found)
MOVP SD718 D0
First matched First matched
location found location

(Transfer the number of matched data)


MOVP SD719 D1
Number of Number of
matched data matches

77 END

Equivalent QCPU program in instruction format


* Execute the search instruction: store the result in the specified devices (D0, D1).

X1
0 SERP D10 D100 D0 K10
Instruction Search data Head device of First matched
execution storage device searched data location
condition
34 END

132
8.1 Replace instructions with different QCPU instruction format
(excluding AnACPU/AnUCPU dedicated instructions)

8.1.2 ASCII code conversion instruction “ASC”


ASCII code conversion instruction is replaced with “SM1255” because it is an unconvertible instruction and its
specification is incompatible with QCPU. Modification in accordance with the specifications is needed. (For Basic
model QCPUs, it is replaced with “SM999”.)
This section explains replacement of the ASCII code conversion instruction “ASC”.

Frequently asked questions regarding the conversion of ACPU to QCPU program

(Inquiry example)
1. Instead of the “$MOV” instruction, which has similar functionality, the ASCII code
conversion instruction “ASC” is replaced with “SM1255” as an unconvertible instruction.
Are the “$MOV” and “ASC” instructions the same?

2. The Transition Handbook (Fundamentals) lists $MOV as a conversion candidate for the
“ASC” instruction. Are there any precautions in this modification?

(Answer)
The “ASC” instruction in ACPU, and the “$MOV” instruction in QCPU are slightly different.
For this reason, “ASC” is replaced with “SM1255” as an unconvertible instruction. Check
the specifications and functions before changing to the “$MOV” instruction.

A. Specifications of ASCII codes conversion instruction


The following are the ASCII code conversion instruction specifications for ACPU and QCPU
(1) ACPU (Instruction: ASC)
• Converts up to 8 characters.
• When there are 7 characters or less, it is converted and stored as 8 characters (4 words).
(space (20H) is stored until reaching 8 characters.)
• “P” is not appended to the instruction, however, the operation is only executed when the execution
condition pulses ON.
(2) QCPU (Instruction: $MOV)
• Converts up to 32 characters.
• Device points of storage destination may change (number of characters + 1 byte (rounded up in units of
word)).
• Execute the operation as long as the execution condition is ON.
(To execute the operation only when the condition for instruction execution pulses ON, change the
instruction to “$MOVP”.)

133
8.1 Replace instructions with different QCPU instruction format
(excluding AnACPU/AnUCPU dedicated instructions)

B. Occupied device points


The “ASC” instruction in ACPU occupies 4 words. The number of device points occupied by the “$MOV”
instruction in QCPU may change according to the number of characters+1 byte.
When replacing an “ASC” instruction that specifies 8 characters with the “$MOV” instruction in QCPU, the
number of occupied points increases because the stored ASCII code occupies 4 devices + 1 word (delimiter
“00H”). If the additional device was being used for other purposes, its content will clear to “0000H”.
Modification is necessary when the devices used by the “ASC” instruction +1 are used for other operations.

(Example of stored data)


(1) 5 characters
ACPU: (ASC 1234A D0)
QCPU: ($MOV “1234A” D0)
Device ACPU QCPU
D0 3231 (H) 3231 (H)
D1 3433 (H) 3433 (H)
D2 2041 (H) 0041 (H)
D3 2020 (H) No change
D4 No change No change

(2) 8 characters
ACPU: (ASC 1234ABCD D0)
QCPU: ($MOV “1234ABCD” D0)
Device ACPU QCPU
D0 3231 (H) 3231 (H)
D1 3433 (H) 3433 (H)
D2 4241 (H) 4241 (H)
D3 4443 (H) 4443 (H)
D4 No change 0000 (H)

134
8.1 Replace instructions with different QCPU instruction format
(excluding AnACPU/AnUCPU dedicated instructions)

C. Program replacement example


ACPU "ASC" instruction program
* Up to 8 characters of ASCII codes are stored in D0 to D3.

M0
0 ASC ABCD1234 D0

* Up to 8 characters of ASCII codes are stored in D10 to D13.


* 5 characters are specified. Higher byte of D12: 20H, D13: 2020H.
M1
14 ASC XYZ789 D10

28 END

Replacement QCPU program


(Unconvertible instructions are replaced with SM1255)
* Conversion to character string instruction, ASC, is unconvertible and replaced with "SM1255".

M0
0 SM1255

* Conversion to character string instruction, ASC, is unconvertible and replaced with "SM1255".
M1
3 SM1255

6 END

Modified QCPU program using "$MOV" instruction


8 characters are specified, and ASCII codes are stored in D0 to D3.
Since “00H” is added after the last character, “0000H” is stored in D4.
When the program is replaced, make sure that D4 is not used elsewhere for other purposes.

M0
0 $MOVP “ABCD1234” D0

Stores ASCII code of up to 32 characters in D10.


The last occupied device is D25 when 32 characters are specified.
However, “0000H” is stored in D26 because “00H” is added after the last character.
M1
103 $MOVP “1234567890123456” D10

203 END

135
8.2 Replace AnACPU/AnUCPU dedicated instructions

8.2 Replace AnACPU/AnUCPU dedicated instructions


AnACPU/AnUCPU dedicated instructions can be converted into QCPU instruction format. This section explains
the replacement of AnACPU/AnUCPU dedicated instructions.

Frequently asked questions regarding the conversion of ACPU to QCPU program

(Inquiry example)
Several AnACPU/AnUCPU dedicated instructions were used in the program. However,
converting the program to QCPU format reduced them to just one instruction. Can this
program be executed as it is?

(Answer)
Replacing AnACPU/AnUCPU dedicated instructions with QCPU instructions changes and
simplifies the instruction format.
Further modification of the program is not necessary.

(Inquiry example)
Can the AnACPU/AnUCPU dedicated instructions for special function modules also be
replaced?
(Answer)
AnACPU/AnUCPU special function modules and QCPU intelligent function modules have
different functions, specifications, number of occupied points, etc.
The AnACPU/AnUCPU special function module instructions cannot access the QCPU,
therefore, they are replaced with “SM1255” as unconvertible instructions.
Modify the program according to the functions and specifications of QCPU intelligent
function modules.
Instructions for extended file registers and data link are also replaced with “SM1255.”
Please modify the instructions in accordance with QCPU functions and specifications.

136
8.2 Replace AnACPU/AnUCPU dedicated instructions

A. Representations of dedicated instruction


The QCPU unifies AnACPU/AnUCPU dedicated instructions- LEDA, LEDB, LEDC, SUB, and LEDR- into one
single instruction, which has the same format as the basic and application instructions.
Instructions that do not have a corresponding QCPU instruction are replaced with "OUT SM1255". Replace or
delete the instructions that have been converted to "OUT SM1255".

QCPU AnACPU/AnUCPU

Command
LEDA(B) Instruction name
LEDC/SUB S
Command
Instruction name S D n LEDC/SUB D
LEDC/SUB n
LEDR

S, D, n indicate the data used in the instructions.

B. Dedicated instructions with changed instruction names


In AnACPU/AnUCPU, dedicated instructions share the same name as basic and application instructions.
In QCPU, instruction names have been changed.

Function QCPU AnACPU/AnUCPU


Floating decimal point addition E+ ADD
Floating decimal point subtraction E- SUB
Floating decimal point multiplication E* MUL
Floating decimal point division E/ DIV
Data dissociation NDIS DIS
Data linking NUNI UNI
Changing check pattern CHKCIR, CHKEND CHK, CHKEND

137
8.2 Replace AnACPU/AnUCPU dedicated instructions

C. Program replacement example


(1) Direct output instructions

AnACPU/AnUCPU program
* Direct output.

M0 * (DOUT: Direct output instructions)


0 LEDA DOUT

LEDC Y10
Direct output
device

LEDR

18 END

Replacement QCPU program


* Direct output.

M0
0 DY10
Direct output
device

4 END

(2) Conversion instruction from hexadecimal ASCII to BIN 32-bit data


AnACPU/AnUCPU program
* Conversion from hexadecimal ASCII to BIN 32-bit data.

M0 * (Conversion instruction from ASCII to BIN)


0 LEDB DHABIN

LEDC D0
Head device of
ASCII data

LEDC D10
Conversion
result

LEDR

21 END

Replacement QCPU program


* Conversion from hexadecimal ASCII to BIN 32-bit data.

M0 * (Conversion instruction from ASCII to BIN)


0 DHABINP D0 D10
Head device of Conversion
ASCII data result

6 END

138
8.2 Replace AnACPU/AnUCPU dedicated instructions

(3) Addition instruction of floating decimal point type real number

AnACPU/AnUCPU program
* Real number addition instruction.
* (E+: Replacement for ADD, real number
M2 addition instruction )
0 LEDB ADD

LEDC D10
Head device of
data to be added

LEDC D20
Head device
of first addend

LEDC D30
Head device
of addition result

LEDR

24 END

Replacement QCPU program


* Real number addition instruction.

M2 * (E+: Replacement for ADD, real number addition instruction )


0 E+P D10 D20 D30
Head device of data Head device Head device
to be added of first addend of addition result

7 END

139
8.3 Use index register as a 32-bit (2-word) device

8.3 Use index register as a 32-bit (2-word) device


After replacing ACPU instructions that use index registers, review and modify the programs because the A
Series and Q Series index registers differ in specifications (Z and V are for ACPU, and Z0 to Z15 are for QCPU).
The following are precautions for converting ACPU instructions that use index registers.

Frequently asked questions regarding the conversion of ACPU to QCPU program

(Inquiry example)
1. Device modification using index registers resulted in different Z and V device numbers.
Which QCPU devices are the Z and V devices in ACPU replaced with?

2. Index registers were used as 32-bit devices (2 words) in ACPU. However, when
upgrading to QCPU, the values of the index registers used for other purposes were
overwritten.
Can index registers be used as 32-bit devices (2 words) in QCPU?

(Answer)
The ACPU index registers, Z, Z1 to Z6, V, and V1 to V6, are replaced with Z0 to Z15.
If the index registers were used as 16-bit devices (1 word) in ACPU, the device numbers
will change once upgraded to QCPU. However, modification of the program is unnecessary.
If the index registers were used as 32-bit devices (2 words) in ACPU, the combination of Z
and V converts to Zn and Zn+1 in QCPU.
The index register numbers are different after replacement and modification of the program
is necessary.

140
8.3 Use index register as a 32-bit (2-word) device

A. Replacing index register


"Z, Z1 to Z6, V, V1 to V6" and "Z0 to Z15" are used as index register for the ACPU and QCPU, respectively.
Therefore, their specifications differ.
"V" is used as edge relay for the QCPU. This device is used to store the PLS/PLF information of the contacts
found at the start of the ladder block.
The following table shows how the index registers should be replaced when changing ACPU programs to
QCPU programs using "Change PLC type".

ACPU QCPU
Z Z0
Z1 to Z6 Z1 to Z6
V Z7
V1 to V6 Z8 to Z13

Tip
When indexing timer/counter contact instructions, such as “LD T0”, the index register limitations do not apply to
AnA/AnUCPU.
Due to the specifications, only index registers Z0 and Z1 can be used to index timer/counter contact
instructions in QCPU.
If the existing AnA/AnUCPU program uses index registers other than Z and Z1, the instructions are
unconvertible and are replaced with SM1255. In this case, it is necessary to modify the program.

B. Index register 32-bit specification


When using index registers in 32-bit instructions in ACPU, Z register is the low- order 16 bits and the V
register, with the same number as Z, is the high-order 16 bits.
Alternatively, the QCPU treats Zn and Zn + 1 as the low-order and high-order 16 bits respectively.
The index registers should be corrected if "Change PLC type" is performed on a program that includes 32-bit
index registers.
The following is an example of instructions that have 32-bit operation results.

Instruction ACPU QCPU


V1, Z1 Z2, Z1
DMOV D0 Z1
(High order) (Low order) (High order) (Low order)
Z1(Quotient) Z1(Quotient)
/ D0 D1 Z1
V1(Remainder) Z2(Remainder)

When converting an ACPU program to QCPU using "Change PLC type", the operation result may be stored
to an unintended index register number.

141
8.3 Use index register as a 32-bit (2-word) device

C. Program replacement example


(1) When using index register as 16-bit (1-word) data
The index register numbers will change after converting the ACPU program to QCPU, but it is not necessary
to modify the program.

ACPU program
* Indexing devices with index register Z.

M0
0 MOVP D0 R0Z
Logging data Data logging
Data logging save destination
command

INCP Z

* Indexing devices with index register V.


M1
9 MOVP W0 R1000V
Logging data Data logging
Data logging save destination
command

INCP V

18 END

Replacement QCPU program


* Indexing devices with index register Z.

M0
0 MOVP D0 R0Z0
Logging data Data logging
Data logging save destination
command Z0 <- replaced ACPU device “Z”

INCP Z0

* Indexing devices with index register V.


M1
6 MOVP W0 R1000Z7
Logging data Data logging
Data logging save destination
command Z7 <- replaced ACPU device “V”

INCP Z7

12 END

142
8.3 Use index register as a 32-bit (2-word) device

(2) When using index register as 32-bit (2-word) data


The index register numbers and their combination will change after converting the ACPU program to QCPU.
It is necessary to modify the program.

ACPU program
X0
0 /P D0 K10 Z
Data to be
divided
Quotient is stored in Z and remainder
is stored in V.
MOVP V R0Z1
Remainder data
save destination
Z1 does not interfere with the division instruction.

INCP Z1

18 END

Replacement QCPU program


X0
0 /P D0 K10 Z0
Data to be
divided
Quotient is stored in Z0 and remainder
is stored in Z1.
MOVP Z1 R0Z1
Remainder data
Z1 is not stored in the proper location because Z1 is overwritten save destination
by the remainder of the division instruction.

INCP Z1

12 END

Modified/corrected QCPU program


X0
0 /P D0 K10 Z0
Data to be
divided Quotient is stored in Z0 and remainder
is stored in Z1.
MOVP Z1 R0Z2
Remainder data
Since Z1 is overwritten by the remainder of the division save destination
instruction, change it to an unused index register.

INCP Z2

12 END

143
9. Utilize SFC programs (Replace MELSAP-ΙΙ with MELSAP3)

9. Utilize SFC programs (Replace MELSAP-ΙΙ with MELSAP3)


Solution and Benefit
• The SFC program (MELSAP-ΙΙ) created in ACPU can be converted to QCPU SFC program
(MELSAP3) through "Change PLC type" in GX Developer. This program can be used without
further modifications.
• SFC program (MELSAP3) has the same specifications in QnACPU as in QCPU. Therefore, it is not
necessary to modify the program after executing "Change PLC type" in GX Developer.
• SFC programs (MELSAP-ΙΙ and MELSAP3) created with MS-DOS-compatible programming
software (SW�IVD/NX-GPPA and SW�IVD/NX-GPPQ) can be converted and utilized after being
imported to GX Developer.

This chapter explains how to replace SFC programs (MELSAP-ΙΙ) created in ACPU with SFC programs
(MELSAP3) for QCPU and the necessary modifications after the replacement.

144
9. Utilize SFC programs (Replace MELSAP-ΙΙ with MELSAP3)

A. Operation for utilizing SFC program

Procedure 1: Changing programmable controller type in GX Developer

"Change PLC type" is a function that changes the target programmable controller type of the data being read
through GX Developer. The sequence programs are also automatically converted to comply with the target
programmable controller. However, instructions that cannot convert automatically are replaced with the
instructions shown below.
• High Performance Model QCPU: OUT SM1255
• Basic Model QCPU: OUT SM999

Search for these "OUT" instructions or SM1255/SM999 devices and manually modify the converted programs.
Additionally, intelligent function modules and network modules may require program and parameter
modifications.

(Project menu)

([Change PLC type] window)

* For detail operation instructions, refer to the following manual.


Transition from MELSEC-A/QnA(Large Type)Series to Q Series Handbook(Fundamentals)(L-08043ENG)
[7.1.2 Changing programmable controller type]

Tip
Files in GPPQ/GPPA format, which were created/saved using SW�IVD-GPPA, SW�IVD/NX-GPPQ, should be
converted into GX Developer format using "Import file".
Execute "Change PLC type" after the file is imported to GX Developer.
* For detail operation instructions, refer to the following manual.
Transition from MELSEC-A/QnA(Large Type)Series to Q Series Handbook(Fundamentals)(L-08043ENG)
[7.1.4 Reading (Reusing) other format files]

145
9. Utilize SFC programs (Replace MELSAP-ΙΙ with MELSAP3)

Procedure 2: Program settings in GX Developer

When SFC programs have been created as ACPU program file, they are replaced with the following 2
programs.
• Ladder instructions: MAIN
• SFC programs: MAIN-SFC

To execute multiple programs, such as "MAIN" and "MAIN-SFC", go to "Program" found in "Parameter" of PLC
to set the program name, execution type, and the order of execution during each scan.

(Program file name after changing programmable controller type)

(Program settings window)

* For detail operation instructions, refer to the following manual.


Transition from MELSEC-A/QnA(Large Type)Series to Q Series Handbook(Fundamentals)(L-08043ENG)
[7.7.10 Setting method when multiple sequence programs are created]

146
9. Utilize SFC programs (Replace MELSAP-ΙΙ with MELSAP3)

B. Precautions for replacing MELSAP-II with MELSAP3


The basic operation of the MELSAP3 is the same as the MELSAP-ΙΙ, but the specifications are partially
different.
This section provides the precautions for the replacement.
(1) Starting SFC program
The SFC program can be started by using the special relay for starting/stopping the SFC program.
The special relay used for starting/stopping SFC programs changes according to the programmable
controller type.
ACPU: M9101 -> QCPU: SM321
Please take the precaution listed below because the specifications of the special relays are different for
each CPU.

Specifications
Precautions for replacement
MELSAP-ΙΙ (M9101) MELSAP3 (M321)
When starting/stopping the SFC program
SFC program starts up at default,
Switches on and off with user according to user conditions, operations
since system is automatically turned
operation. such as turning SM321 on/off must be
on.
handled in the program.

(2) Block information (SFC information device)


The MELSAP-ΙΙ and MELSAP3 have different method of executing the "Block START/STOP" and
"Reading of the number of active steps and active step numbers" with block information (SFC
information device).

Specifications
Item Precautions for replacement
MELSAP-ΙΙ MELSAP3
[START] [START] [START]
Switching the block active bit Switching on the block The program does not need adjustments
on executes forced start. START/STOP bit forcibly when a SFC program for ACPU is
[STOP] starts the corresponding converted to QCPU because
Switching on the block clear block. the "Block active bit" is replaced with
Block START/ bit stops the block and [STOP] "Block START/STOP" bit.
STOP methods switching it off executes Switching off the block [STOP]
forced stop. START/STOP forcibly stops The "Block clear bit" resets the "Block
the corresponding block. START/STOP bit".
Add the SFC control instruction
"RST BLm" to the program.
Delete the program that switches
the "Block clear bit" on/off.

The number of Reads the number of active Reads only the number of active To read the active step numbers,
active steps steps in the corresponding steps in the corresponding block. use the "Active step batch readout
and active step block and active step numbers. instructions (MOV, DMOV, BMOV)".
numbers reading

147
9. Utilize SFC programs (Replace MELSAP-ΙΙ with MELSAP3)

重 要
IMPORTANT
Performing the following operations on SFC programs created with SW�IVD/NX-GPPA may result in
abnormal SFC chart display and cause creation fault in GX Developer.
• Executing "Import file" in GX Developer to import an SFC program saved in a personal computer.
• Executing "Read from PLC" in GX Developer to read an SFC program from an ACPU.
If a creation fault occurs in the SFC chart, add a dummy step with SW�IVD/NX-GPPA and import the file to GX
Developer.

1. Creation fault examples

No step

No step
No step

2. SFC chart modification


examples
(When adding a dummy step) (When changing to jump transition)

Jump
destination
step

Selective coupling
Addition of
changes to jump transition.
dummy step
The jump destination step
is the one immediately
following the coupling
before modification.

148
9. Utilize SFC programs (Replace MELSAP-ΙΙ with MELSAP3)

C. Precautions for modifying SFC chart


(1) Add “ (dummy step)” as an additional step
If “  (step)” is added, the step number + “?” is displayed/printed due to un-programmed operation output.
(2) As shown below, create a transition condition program in the additional step using a series transition (+).

Tran

If the transition condition program is not created, the transition condition number + “?” is displayed/printed
due to un-programmed transition condition.

149
MEMO

150
Part Ⅲ: Application

151
10. Replace AD75(P/M) with QD75(P/D/M/MH) while utilizing existing positioning parameters and data

10. Replace AD75(P/M) with QD75(P/D/M/MH) while utilizing existing


positioning parameters and data

Solution and Benefit


• Existing positioning parameters and data of the AD75(P�(-S3)/M�) can be used for the QD75(P�/
D�/M�/MH�) with minimal modifications, reducing upgrade time.
• Although the AD75(P�(-S3)/M�) and QD75(P�/D�/M�/MH�) may have different addresses even in
the same setting item, mistakes can be prevented because parameters and data can be used
without having to worry about buffer memory address.

The following is an example of replacing an existing A (Large Type) positioning module with the Q Series while
utilizing existing parameters and data.
● Instructions
After replacing the A (Large Type) modules with the Q Series, reuse/convert positioning parameters and data
of the AD75 using GX Configurator software package for positioning modules.

Software packages to be used are as follows:


• For AD75 models: GX Configurator-AP Version 1 (SW�D5C-AD75P-E)
• For QD75 models: GX Configurator-QP Version 2 (SW�D5C-QD75P-E)

A. System configuration example

Current configuration After replacement


Power supply

(P/D/M/MH)
QCPU
AD75(P/M)

Power supply

QD75
ACPU

Replace
module

module

*Utilize existing positioning parameters and data when replacing.

152
10. Replace AD75(P/M) with QD75(P/D/M/MH) while utilizing existing positioning parameters and data

B. How to use existing positioning parameters and data


Step 1
Read positioning parameters and data from the AD75 using “GX Configurator-AP”.

OS memory Flash ROM

Parameters OS memory
GX Configurator-AP
(SW�D5C-AD75P-E) Positioning data Positioning data
No. 1 to 100 No. 1 to 100

Start block data Start block data

Positioning data Positioning data


No. 101 to 600 No. 101 to 600

Buffer memory
Write to AD75/read from AD75/verify
AD75 data Parameters

Positioning data
No. 1 to 100
Write to/read from Flash ROM
Start block data

Monitor data,
control data area, etc.
AD75� poisoning module

Step 2
Save positioning parameters and data using “GX Configurator-AP”. (Creating a AD75 file)
* Save in the file format to be read by “GX Configurator-QP”.

153
10. Replace AD75(P/M) with QD75(P/D/M/MH) while utilizing existing positioning parameters and data

Step 3
Read the AD75 file using “GX Configurator-QP”.

GX Configurator-QP
(SW�D5C-QD75P-E)

Example of reading a file created with GX Configurator-AP.

Step 4
Specify item(s) that need to be changed in “GX Configurator-QP”.

154
10. Replace AD75(P/M) with QD75(P/D/M/MH) while utilizing existing positioning parameters and data

Step 5
Write all positioning parameters and data, including modified data, to the “QD75 using GX Configurator-QP”.

Buffer memory

Parameters
Via QCPU, Q Series compatible serial
communication module, or Servo parameters
MELSECNET/H network remote I/O
module* Positioning data

*Only when directly connected to the Block start data


remote I/O module.

Flash ROM

Parameters
Write to module/read from module/verify module data
Servo parameters

Positioning data

Block start data


Write to Flash ROM

Tip
• To use GX Configurator-AP data in GX Configurator-QP, it is necessary to save the file in a format that can
be read by GX Configurator-QP. Files saved in GX Configurator-AP format cannot be read by GX
Configurator-QP.
• Due to specification differences between the AD75 and QD75, some positioning parameters may require
setting changes. Refer to the related manuals for details on the modifications. Note that positioning data
does not require any modifications.
• Related manuals
(a) AD75

Title Manual No.


A1SD75P1-S3/P2-S3/P3-S3, AD75P1-S3/P2-S3/P3-S3 Positioning Module IB-66716
User's Manual (Details)
A1SD75M1/M2/M3, AD75M1/M2/75M Positioning Module User's Manual (Details) IB-66715
GX Configurator-AP Version 1 Operating Manual IB-66900
(b) QD75

Title Manual No.


Type QD75P/QD75D Positioning Module User's Manual (Details) SH-080058
Type QD75M Positioning Module User's Manual (Details) IB-0300062
Type QD75MH Positioning Module User's Manual (Details) IB-0300117
GX Configurator-QP Version 2 Operating Manual SH-080172

155
11. Create a sample program for MELSECNET(ΙΙ) or MELSECNET/B link refresh using A/QnA -> Q conversion support tool

11. Create a sample program for MELSECNET(ΙΙ) or MELSECNET/B link


refresh using A/QnA -> Q conversion support tool
Solution and Benefit
A sequence program (sample program) can be created to automatically perform link refresh by
entering the existing network conditions in the A/QnA -> Q conversion support tool.

A/QnA -> Q conversion support tool


This tool is designed to reduce the work load when replacing A/QnA Series modules with Q Series modules.
The tool contains the following functions.
• Extracts parts of the program that were not automatically converted and displays the appropriate modification
procedures. (Reduces program modification time.)
• Automatically creates link refresh sample program when using MELSECNET(ΙΙ)/B local station data link
module, A1SJ71A�23(B)Q. (Program creation is unnecessary as it is automatically generated)
The “A/QnA ->Q conversion support tool” can be downloaded for free from the “MELFANSweb”.

156
11. Create a sample program for MELSECNET(ΙΙ) or MELSECNET/B link refresh using A/QnA -> Q conversion support tool

● Conditions for program creation


A. System configuration example

Master station(M)

Power supply

A3ACPUP21

I/O module

I/O module

I/O module
module

MELSECNET(ΙΙ) (optical)

Local station 1
Q02H
CPU

module

module

module
Q61P

I/O

I/O

I/O

Q38B
QC�B
The A/QnA -> Q conversion support tool creates
a link refresh sequence program for this module.
Empty

Empty

Empty
A1SJ71
AP23Q
61PN
A1S

QA1S65B

Second tier
Local station 2 Local station 1
A2ACPUP21
Power supply

Power supply
A2ACPUP21

I/O module

I/O module

I/O module
I/O module

I/O module

I/O module
module

module

Third tier's
Local station 3 master station(m) Local station 2
Power supply

Power supply
A2NCPUP21

A2NCPUP21
I/O module

I/O module

Third tier
I/O module

I/O module

I/O module
AJ71AP21
module

module

157
11. Create a sample program for MELSECNET(ΙΙ) or MELSECNET/B link refresh using A/QnA -> Q conversion support tool

B. Master station network parameter (Master station(M) for the second tier)
The following are examples of the master station's network parameters and transient communication
program.
The parameter settings for the master station are the conditions used to create a link refresh sequence
program for the local station data link module.
(a) Network type selection

(b) Setting examples for each network type


1) MELSECNET mode (Network range assignment: set for the first half only)

158
11. Create a sample program for MELSECNET(ΙΙ) or MELSECNET/B link refresh using A/QnA -> Q conversion support tool

2) MELSECNET ΙΙ composite mode (Network range assignment: set for the first half and second half)

(c) Program example of transient instruction


Transient communication is being performed if the following instructions are in the master station's
sequence program.
The use of transient communication is one of the conditions that should be taken into account when
creating a link refresh sequence program.

X0 M9200 M9201 M9202 M9203


LRDP K1 D0 D100 K10
Read from LRDP LRDP LWTP LWTP Other station Read data
other station instruction instruction instruction instruction read device storage
received completed received completed
X1 M9200 M9201 M9202 M9203
LWTP K1 D20 D300 K10
Write to LRDP LRDP LWTP LWTP Other station
other station instruction instruction instruction instruction write destination
received completed received completed device

159
11. Create a sample program for MELSECNET(ΙΙ) or MELSECNET/B link refresh using A/QnA -> Q conversion support tool

C. Procedure for creating link refresh sequence program


The following are the procedures for creating a link refresh sequence program using the A/QnA -> Q
conversion support tool.
Step 1: Start up
Start the "A/QnA -> Q conversion support tool".
Click the "A/QnA -> Q conversion support tool" icon.

Step 2: Menu selection


Select the "A/QnA -> Q conversion support tool" menu.

(a) Click "MELSECNET (II) local station refresh program generation tool start" on the Menu screen.

160
11. Create a sample program for MELSECNET(ΙΙ) or MELSECNET/B link refresh using A/QnA -> Q conversion support tool

Step 3: Enter conditions for program creation


Enter conditions for program creation in the "Refresh program generation tool for MELSECNET(ΙΙ) local
station" screen.

(a)

(b)

(c)

(d)

(e) (f)

(a) Select a Q Series CPU type to which MELSECNET(ΙΙ) local station module is mounted.
For the case shown in "A. System configuration example", found under "● Conditions for program
creation", select "Q02H".
(b) Enter the I/O number of the slot on which MELSECNET(ΙΙ) local station module is mounted.
This setting determines the start number of the FROM/TO instruction's access target.
Enter the I/O number after checking the actual system.
The CPU may stop if the I/O number differs from the one that is actually mounted.
(c) Set the network type (mode) to match the one set in the master station (M) network parameters.
Refer to "B. Master station network parameter (Master station (M) for the second tier)" under
"● Conditions for program creation" for an example.
(d) Check this box if the station which contains the refresh program is a local station in the third tier.
(e) Refer to "(c) Program example of transient instruction" found in section B of "● Conditions for program
creation", and select the check boxes if the transient instructions corresponding to "local station data link
module mounted station" exist in the master station program.
(f) Select this button to move on to "Step 4", link refresh device setting.
Make sure the settings are correct.

161
11. Create a sample program for MELSECNET(ΙΙ) or MELSECNET/B link refresh using A/QnA -> Q conversion support tool

Step 4: Link refresh device setting


Set link refresh devices for the CPU module side.

(a)

(b)

(c)

(a) Set MELSECNET(ΙΙ) local station's special link relay and link special registers as the link refresh devices
on the CPU module side.
Device numbers are fixed when the device name is SM or SD.
For other device names, device numbers can be specified.
Link refresh is not performed if the "Device name" column is blank.
(b) Set link devices to be refreshed on the CPU module side.
When the start number is set, the following points are automatically occupied.
B/W: 1024 points (for MELSECNET mode)
4096 points (for MELSECNET ΙΙ composite mode)
X/Y: 2048 points
Note that the actual link refresh points are the ones set for "Network range assignment" in the master
station (M) network parameter.
(c) Create a link refresh sample program using the settings in "Step 3" and "Step 4".

162
11. Create a sample program for MELSECNET(ΙΙ) or MELSECNET/B link refresh using A/QnA -> Q conversion support tool

Step 5: Save the program


Confirm the save destination for the link refresh sample program.

(a)

(a) The save destination cannot be specified by the user.


The folder name is created according to "PLC type" and "I/O number" entered in (a) and (b) of "Step 3".
(Example) When the programmable controller type is Q25H, and the I/O number is 200, the folder name
is "Q25H_200".
If the same folder name already exists, it is overwritten.

When creating a link refresh sample program for multiple devices that have the same
programmable controller type and I/O number, move the project to a different location, or
rename and save the created project using GX Developer.

Step 6: Complete the creation of sample program


End the operation of "A/QnA -> Q conversion support tool".

(a)

(a) Select "Exit" to end the operation of the "A/QnA -> Q conversion support tool".
The "A/QnA -> Q conversion support tool" screen will close.

163
11. Create a sample program for MELSECNET(ΙΙ) or MELSECNET/B link refresh using A/QnA -> Q conversion support tool

Step 7: Check the created sample program file


Check the sample program file created by the "A/QnA -> Q conversion support tool".
Open the folder in which the sample program file is stored.
(Example) C:\MELSEC\AQCnvSupport\Q25H_200

Step 8: Open the created sample program


Start GX Developer, and open the sample program created in the "A/QnA -> Q conversion support tool".
(Example) Click Gppw.gpj in "C:\MELSEC\AQCnvSupport\Q25H_200"

Step 9: Check the sample program


Open the created sample program.
Display the statements through the View menu and check the program.
(Example) Display of program and its statements

164
11. Create a sample program for MELSECNET(ΙΙ) or MELSECNET/B link refresh using A/QnA -> Q conversion support tool

Step 10: Configure and write the sample program to the programmable controller CPU
Perform the following operations using GX Developer.

(a) Rename and save the sample program project.


(b) In order to use the renamed and saved sample program in the specified Q Series CPU's program file,
select "Project" -> "Copy", and paste the sample program to the "Program" of the specified Q Series CPU.
(c) Select "PLC parameter" -> "Program", and set the "Execute type" of the added program to "Scan".
(d) Write the parameters and the sequence program to the specified Q Series CPU.

165
MEMO

166
APPENDICES

167
Appendix 1 Compatible CPUs for each network (MELSECNET(ΙΙ), MELSECNET/10, MELSECNET/H)

Appendix 1 Compatible CPUs for each network


(MELSECNET(ΙΙ), MELSECNET/10, MELSECNET/H)

This section lists the compatible CPU types and possible CPU combinations for each network configuration
(MELSECNET(ΙΙ), MELSECNET/10, MELSECNET/H).

Appendix 1.1 System configuration for MELSECNET/10 and MELSECNET/H


(PLC to PLC network)
The following table shows the CPU types that are compatible with MELSECNET/10 and MELSECNET/H (PLC
to PLC network) network systems.
Normal station*1
Control station AnU, AnA, AnN,
Q (Q Mode) QnA Q (A Mode) AnS(H)
MELSECNET/10 mode ○ ○ ○ ○*2
MELSECNET/H mode
○ ×*3
Q (Q Mode) (10 Mbps)
MELSECNET/H mode
○ ×*3
(25 Mbps)
QnA (MELSECNET/10 mode) ○ ○ ○ ○*2
AnU, Q (A Mode)
○ ○ ○ ○*2
(MELSECNET/10 mode)
AnA, AnN, AnS(H)*4 ×

○: Compatible ×: Not compatible


*1: Cannot be mixed with a remote I/O station.
*2: Restrictions may apply to the B/W link range depending on the CPU type
AnA : B/W000 to FFF
AnN, AnS(H): B/W000 to 3FF
*3: CPUs other than Q Series CPU (Q mode) cannot be combined because a network system can be
configured with Q Series CPU (Q mode) only.
*4: Cannot be a control station.

168
Appendix 1 Compatible CPUs for each network (MELSECNET(ΙΙ), MELSECNET/10, MELSECNET/H)

Appendix 1.2 System configuration for existing MELSECNET(ΙΙ) in combination


with Q Series CPU
The following table shows combinations of Q Series CPU with the existing MELSECNET(ΙΙ) data link systems.

Local station/Remote I/O station

Q (High QnA, Remote


Master station Q (Basic model) AnN,
Performance AnU, I/O station
Q (Universal model) AnS(H)
model) AnA (AJ72P25)

Q (High Performance model)*1 ×


Q (Basic model)* 1
×
Q (Universal model)*1 ×
MELSECNET ΙΙ △* 2
×* 3
○ ×
QnA, AnU,
MELSECNET ΙΙ composite △*2 ×*3 ○ ○*4
AnA
MELSECNET △*2 ×*3 ○ ○*4
MELSECNET ΙΙ*5 ×
AnN, AnS(H) MELSECNET ΙΙ composite* 5
×
MELSECNET △* 2
× ○ ○*4

○:Applicable △:Applicable (with restrictions) ×:Not applicable

*1: Cannot be a master station.


*2: Can be combined with data link system when a local station module (such as A1SJ71AP23Q) is
mounted on the extension base unit (QA1S6�B).
*3: Extension base unit (QA1S6�B) cannot be connected.
*4: A local station and a remote I/O station can be mixed in the data link system.
*5: MELSECNET ΙΙ mode and MELSECNET ΙΙ composite mode are not supported.

Appendix 1.3 System configuration for MELSECNET/10 and MELSECNET/H


(remote I/O network)
The following table shows the CPU types that are compatible with MELSECNET/10 and MELSECNET/H
(remote I/O network) network systems. (The listed network modules are for optical loop. For coaxial loop,
coaxial bus, and twisted bus, use their respective modules)

Master station Remote I/O station (compatible network module)


Network module/
CPU QJ72LP25-25 A(1S)J72QLP25 A(1S)J72LP25 A(1S)J72P25
Data link module
Q (Other than basic model) QJ71LP21-25 ○ × ×
Q (Basic model) QJ71LP21-25 × × ×
A(1S)J71QLP21 × ○ ×
QnA
A(1S)J71AP21* 1
× × ○
A(1S)J71LP21 ×*3 ○ ×
AnU, Q (A mode)
A(1S)J71AP21* 1
× × ○
A(1S)J71LP21*2 × × ×
AnA, AnN, AnS(H)
A(1S)J71AP21* 1
× × ○

○: Compatible ×: Not compatible

*1: Module for MELSECNET(ΙΙ) data link system.


*2: Compatible with normal station only.
*3: A module with a five digits of serial No. 15012 or higher can be used by setting it to the
MELSECNET/10 mode.

169
Appendix 1 Compatible CPUs for each network (MELSECNET(ΙΙ), MELSECNET/10, MELSECNET/H)

Appendix 1.4 System configuration for redundant system network


(1) System configuration for MELSECNET/10 and MELSECNET/H (PLC to PLC network) network systems
The following table shows combinations of MELSECNET/10 and MELSECNET/H (PLC to PLC network)
network systems with redundant systems.

Normal station
Q Q4AR
QnA, AnU,
Control station
AnA, AnN,
Redundant Standalone Redundant Standalone AnS(H)

MELSECNET/H mode ○ ○ × × ×
Redundant
MELSECNET/10 mode ○
Q
MELSECNET/H mode ○ ○ × × ×
Standalone
MELSECNET/10 mode ○
Redundant ○
Q4AR
Standalone ○
QnA, AnU* 1
× ○ × ○ ○
AnA, AnN, AnS(H)*2 ×

○: Applicable ×: Not applicable

*1: Cannot be configured for redundant systems.


*2: Cannot be a control station.

(2) System configuration for MELSECNET/10 and MELSECNET/H (remote I/O network) network systems
The following table shows combinations of MELSECNET/10 and MELSECNET/H (remote I/O network)
network systems with redundant systems. (The network modules listed are optical loop modules. For
coaxial loop, coaxial bus, and twisted bus, replace with the appropriate modules.)
(Example)

Master station Remote I/O station (compatible network module)


CPU Network module QJ72LP25-25 A(1S)J72QLP25 A(1S)J72LP25 A(1S)J72P25
QnPRH QJ71LP21-25 ○ × ×
AJ71LP21* 1

Q4AR
AJ71QLP21 × ○ ×

○: Applicable ×: Not applicable

*1: Cannot be combined with Q4ARCPU.

The previously noted “Q&A on Transition from A/QnA (Large Type) Series to Q Series” has been moved to the
Notice FA site’s FAQ. Please refer to the FA site for questions regarding AQ transition.

170
MEMO

171
Warranty
Please confirm the following product warranty details before using this product.

1. Gratis Warranty Term and Gratis Warranty Range


If any faults or defects (hereinafter "Failure") found to be the responsibility of Mitsubishi occurs during use of
the product within the gratis warranty term, the product shall be repaired at no cost via the sales
representative or Mitsubishi Service Company.
However, if repairs are required onsite at domestic or overseas location, expenses to send an engineer will
be solely at the customer's discretion. Mitsubishi shall not be held responsible for any re-commissioning,
maintenance, or testing on-site that involves replacement of the failed module.
[Gratis Warranty Term]
The gratis warranty term of the product shall be for three years after the date of purchase or delivery to a
designated place.
Note that after manufacture and shipment from Mitsubishi, the maximum distribution period shall be six (6)
months, and the longest gratis warranty term after manufacturing shall be fourty-two (42) months. The
gratis warranty term of repair parts shall not exceed the gratis warranty term before repairs.
[Gratis Warranty Range]
(1) As a principle, the primary fault diagnosis must be preformed by the user.
If requested by the client, Mitsubishi or Mitsubishi's service network can perform the work for a fee. In
this case, if Mitsubishi is found at fault for the cause of the fault, the service will be performed for free.
(2) The range shall be limited to normal use within the usage state, usage methods and usage
environment, etc., which follow the conditions and precautions, etc., given in the instruction manual,
user's manual and caution labels on the product.
(3) Even within the gratis warranty term, repairs shall be charged for in the following cases.
1. Failure occurring from inappropriate storage or handling, carelessness or negligence by the user.
Failure caused by the user's hardware or software design.
2. Failure caused by unapproved modifications, etc., to the product by the user.
3. When the Mitsubishi product is assembled into a user's device, Failure that could have been avoided
if functions or structures, judged as necessary in the legal safety measures the user's device is
subject to or as necessary by industry standards, had been provided.
4. Failure that could have been avoided if consumable parts designated in the instruction manual had
been correctly serviced or replaced.
5. Replacement of consumable parts (battery, relay, fuse, etc.).
6. Failure caused by external irresistible forces such as fires or abnormal voltages, and Failure caused
by force majeure such as earthquakes, lightning, wind and water damage.
7. Failure caused by reasons unpredictable by scientific technology standards at time of shipment from
Mitsubishi.
8. Any other failure found not to be the responsibility of Mitsubishi or that admitted not to be so by the
user.
2. Onerous repair term after discontinuation of production
(1) Mitsubishi shall accept onerous product repairs for seven (7) years after production of the product is
discontinued.
Discontinuation of production shall be notified with Mitsubishi Technical Bulletins, etc.
(2) Product supply (including repair parts) is not available after production is discontinued.

3. Overseas service
Overseas, repairs shall be accepted by Mitsubishi's local overseas FA Center. Note that the repair conditions
at each FA Center may differ.

4. Exclusion of loss in opportunity and secondary loss from warranty liability


Regardless of the gratis warranty term, Mitsubishi shall not be liable for compensation of damages caused by
any cause found not to be the responsibility of Mitsubishi, loss in opportunity, lost profits incurred to the user
by Failures of Mitsubishi products, special damages and secondary damages whether foreseeable or not,
compensation for accidents, and compensation for damages to products other than Mitsubishi products,
replacement by the user, maintenance of on-site equipment, start-up test run and other tasks.

5. Changes in product specifications


The specifications given in the catalogs, manuals or technical documents are subject to change without prior
notice.

172
MEMO
Mitsubishi Electric Programmable Controllers
MELSEC-A/QnA Series Transition Examples

Precautions before use


This publication explains the typical features and functions of the products herein and To use the products given in this publication properly, always read the relevant manuals
does not provide restrictions and other information related to usage and module before use.
combinations. Before using the products, always read the product user manuals. The products have been manufactured as general-purpose parts for general industries,
and have not been designed or manufactured to be incorporated in a device or system
Mitsubishi Electric will not be held liable for damage caused by factors found not to be
used in purposes related to human life.
the cause of Mitsubishi Electric; opportunity loss or lost profits caused by faults in
Before using the products for special purposes such as nuclear power, electric power,
Mitsubishi Electric products; damage, secondary damage, or accident compensation, aerospace, medicine or passenger movement vehicles, consult with Mitsubishi.
whether foreseeable or not, caused by special factors; damage to products other than The products have been manufactured under strict quality control. However, when
Mitsubishi Electric products; and to other duties. installing the products where major accidents or losses could occur if the products fail,
install appropriate backup or fail-safe functions in the system.

Country/Region Sales office Tel/Fax


USA Mitsubishi Electric Automation lnc. Tel : +1-847-478-2100
500 Corporate Woods Parkway, Vernon Hills, IL 60061, USA Fax : +1-847-478-2253
Brazil MELCO-TEC Representacao Comercial e Assessoria Tecnica Ltda. Tel : +55-11-4689-3000
Rua Jussara, 1750 - Bloco B- Sala 01 Jardim Santa Cecília- CEP 06465-070, Fax : +55-11-4689-3016
Barueri, São Paulo, Brazil
Germany Mitsubishi Electric Europe B.V. German Branch Tel : +49-2102-486-0
Gothaer Strasse 8, D-40880 Ratingen, Germany Fax : +49-2102-486-1120
UK Mitsubishi Electric Europe B.V. UK Branch Tel : +44-1707-28-8780
Travellers Lane, Hatfield, Hertfordshire, AL10 8XB, UK. Fax : +44-1707-27-8695
Italy Mitsubishi Electric Europe B.V. Italian Branch Tel : +39-039-60531
Viale Colleoni 7-20864 Agrate Brianza (Milano), Italy Fax : +39-039-6053-312
Spain Mitsubishi Electric Europe B.V. Spanish Branch Tel : +34-93-565-3131
Carretera de Rubi 76-80.AC.420, E-08190 Sant Cugat del Valles (Barcelona), Spain Fax : +34-93-589-1579
France Mitsubishi Electric Europe B.V. French Branch Tel : +33-1-5568-5568
25, Boulevard des Bouvets, F-92741 Nanterre Cedex, France Fax : +33-1-5568-5757
Czech Republic Mitsubishi Electric Europe B.V. Czech Branch Tel : +420-251-551-470
Avenir Business Park, Radicka 751/113e, 158 00 Praha5, Czech Republic Fax : +420-251-551-471
Poland Mitsubishi Electric Europe B.V. Polish Branch Tel : +48-12-630-47-00
32-083 Balice ul. Krakowska 50, Poland Fax : +48-12-630-47-01
Russia Mitsubishi Electric Europe B.V. Russian Branch St.Petersburg office Tel : +7-812-633-3497
Piskarevsky pr. 2, bld 2, lit "Sch", BC "Benua", office 720; 195027, Fax : +7-812-633-3499
St. Petersburg, Russia
South Africa CBI-Electric. Tel : +27-11-977-0770
Private Bag 2016, ZA-1600 Isando, South Africa Fax : +27-11-977-0761
China Mitsubishi Electric Automaiton (China) Ltd. Tel : +86-21-2322-3030
10F, Mitsubishi Electric Automation Center, Fax : +86-21-2322-3000
No.1386 Hongqiao Road, Changning District, Shanghai, China
Taiwan Setsuyo Enterprise Co., Ltd. Tel : +886-2-2299-2499
6F., No.105, Wugong 3rd Road, Wugu District, New Taipei City 24889, Taiwan, R.O.C. Fax : +886-2-2299-2509
Korea Mitsubishi Electric Automation Korea Co., Ltd. Tel : +82-2-3660-9530
3F, 1480-6, Gayang-Dong, Gangseo-Gu, Seoul, 157-200, Korea Fax : +82-2-3664-8372
Singapore Mitsubishi Electric Asia Pte, Ltd. Industrial Division Tel : +65-6470-2308
307, Alexandra Road, Mitsubishi Electric Building, Singapore, 159943 Fax : +65-6476-7439
Thailand Mitsubishi Electric Automation (Thailand) Co., Ltd. Tel : +66-2906-3238
Bang-Chan Industrial Estate No.111 Soi Serithai 54, Fax : +66-2906-3239
T.Kannayao, A.Kannayao, Bangkok 10230 Thailand
Indonesia P.T. Autoteknindo Sumber Makmur Tel : +62-21-663-0833
Muara Karang Selatan, Block A/Utara No.1 Kav. Fax : +62-21-663-0832
No.11, Kawasan Industri Pergudangan, Jakarta-Utara 14440, P.O, Box 5045, Indonesia
India Mitsubishi Electric India Pvt. Ltd. Tel : +91-20-2710-2000
Emerald House, EL-3, J Block, M.I.D.C., Bhosari, Pune, 411026, Fax : +91-20-2710-2100
Maharastra State, India
Australia Mitsubishi Electric Australia Pty.Ltd. Tel : +61-2-9684-7777
348 Victoria Road PO BOX11, Rydalmere, N.S.W 2116, Australia Fax : +61-2-9684-7245

HEAD OFFICE: TOKYO BUILDING, 2-7-3, MARUNOUCHI, CHIYODA-KU, TOKYO 100-8310, JAPAN
NAGOYA WORKS: 1-14, YADA-MINAMI 5, HIGASHI-KU, NAGOYA, JAPAN

New publication, effective Sep. 2013.


L(NA)08121E-D 1309(MDOC) Specifications are subject to change without notice.

You might also like